25853
|
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 23 Jan 1999
|
|
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
3 See the end for copying conditions.
|
|
4
|
|
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
|
|
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
|
|
7
|
|
8
|
|
9 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
|
|
10
|
25949
|
11 * New packages
|
|
12
|
|
13 ** delim-col
|
|
14
|
|
15 Helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
|
|
16
|
|
17 Here is an example of columns:
|
|
18
|
|
19 horse apple bus
|
|
20 dog pineapple car EXTRA
|
|
21 porcupine strawberry airplane
|
|
22
|
|
23 Doing the following settings:
|
|
24
|
|
25 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
|
|
26 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
|
|
27 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
|
|
28 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
|
|
29
|
|
30
|
|
31 Selecting the lines above and typing:
|
|
32
|
|
33 M-x delimit-columns-region
|
|
34
|
|
35 It results:
|
|
36
|
|
37 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
|
|
38 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
|
|
39 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
|
|
40
|
|
41 delim-col has the following options:
|
|
42
|
|
43 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
|
|
44 before all columns.
|
|
45
|
|
46 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
|
|
47 between each column.
|
|
48
|
|
49 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
|
|
50 after all columns.
|
|
51
|
|
52 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
|
|
53 each column.
|
|
54
|
|
55 delim-col has the following commands:
|
|
56
|
|
57 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
|
|
58 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
|
|
59
|
25853
|
60 ** Faces and frame parameters.
|
|
61
|
|
62 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
|
|
63 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
|
|
64 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
|
|
65 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
|
|
66 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
|
|
67 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
|
|
68 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
|
|
69
|
|
70 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
|
|
71 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
|
|
72 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
|
|
73 `default' face and vice versa.
|
|
74
|
25951
|
75 ** New face `menu'.
|
|
76
|
|
77 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
|
|
78 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
|
|
79 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
|
|
80
|
25853
|
81 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
|
|
82
|
|
83 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
|
|
84 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
|
|
85 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
|
|
86 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
|
|
87
|
|
88 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
|
|
89 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
|
|
90 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
|
|
91
|
|
92 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
|
|
93 `ScreenGamma'.
|
|
94
|
|
95 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
|
|
96
|
|
97 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
|
|
98 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
|
|
99 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
|
|
100 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
|
|
101 the text.
|
|
102
|
|
103 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
|
|
104
|
|
105 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
|
|
106 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
|
|
107 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
|
|
108 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
|
|
109 specify a font.
|
|
110
|
|
111 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
|
|
112 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
|
|
113 under Lisp changes, below.
|
|
114
|
|
115 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
|
|
116
|
|
117 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
|
|
118 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
|
|
119 it is hollow.
|
|
120
|
|
121 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
|
|
122 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
|
|
123 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
|
|
124 customizing face `fringe'.
|
|
125
|
|
126 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
|
|
127 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
|
|
128
|
|
129 ** LessTif support.
|
|
130
|
|
131 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
|
|
132 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
|
|
133
|
|
134 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
|
|
135
|
|
136 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
|
|
137 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
|
|
138 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
|
|
139 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
|
|
140 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
|
|
141 Emacs.
|
|
142
|
|
143 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
|
|
144 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
|
|
145 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
|
|
146 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
|
|
147 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
|
|
148 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
|
|
149
|
|
150 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
|
|
151 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
|
|
152 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
|
|
153 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
|
|
154 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
|
|
155 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
|
|
156
|
|
157 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
|
|
158 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
|
|
159 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
|
|
160 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
|
|
161 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
|
|
162
|
|
163 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
|
|
164
|
|
165 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
|
|
166 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
|
|
167 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
|
|
168
|
|
169 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
|
|
170
|
|
171 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
|
|
172 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
|
|
173 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
|
|
174 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
|
|
175 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
|
|
176 whitespace.
|
|
177
|
|
178 ** Busy-cursor.
|
|
179
|
|
180 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
|
|
181 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
|
|
182
|
|
183 ** Blinking cursor
|
|
184
|
|
185 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
|
|
186 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
|
|
187 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
|
|
188 the group `cursor'.
|
|
189
|
|
190 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
|
|
191
|
|
192 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
|
|
193 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
|
|
194 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
|
|
195 details.
|
|
196
|
|
197 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
|
|
198 have to do anything to activate it.
|
|
199
|
|
200 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
|
|
201
|
|
202 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
|
|
203 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
|
|
204 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
|
|
205 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
|
|
206
|
|
207 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
|
|
208
|
|
209 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
|
|
210
|
|
211 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
|
|
212
|
|
213 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
|
|
214 one.
|
|
215
|
|
216 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
|
|
217 Motif.
|
|
218
|
|
219 ** Hscrolling in C code.
|
|
220
|
|
221 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
|
|
222
|
|
223 ** Tool bar support.
|
|
224
|
|
225 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
|
|
226 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
|
|
227
|
|
228 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
|
|
229
|
|
230 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
|
|
231 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
|
|
232 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
|
|
233 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
|
|
234 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
|
|
235
|
|
236 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
|
|
237
|
|
238 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
|
|
239 buffers.
|
|
240
|
|
241 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
|
|
242 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
|
|
243
|
|
244 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
|
|
245
|
|
246 - Mouse-1 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
|
|
247 toggles the read-only status.
|
|
248
|
|
249 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
|
|
250
|
|
251 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
|
|
252
|
|
253 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
|
|
254 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialogs' is
|
|
255 non-nil.
|
|
256
|
|
257 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
|
|
258
|
|
259 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
|
|
260 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
|
|
261 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
|
|
262 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
|
|
263 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
|
|
264 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
|
|
265
|
|
266 ** Sound support
|
|
267
|
|
268 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
|
|
269 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
|
|
270 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
|
|
271 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
|
|
272 to enable sound support.
|
|
273
|
|
274 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
|
|
275 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
|
|
276 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
|
|
277 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
|
|
278 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
|
|
279 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
|
|
280
|
|
281 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
|
|
282
|
|
283 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
|
|
284
|
|
285 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
|
|
286 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
|
|
287 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
|
|
288
|
|
289 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
|
|
290 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
|
|
291
|
|
292 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
|
|
293 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
|
|
294 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
|
|
295
|
|
296 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
|
|
297
|
|
298 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
|
|
299 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
|
|
300 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
|
|
301 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
|
|
302
|
|
303 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
|
|
304 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
|
|
305 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
|
|
306 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
|
|
307
|
|
308 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
|
|
309 notably at the end of lines.
|
|
310
|
|
311 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
|
|
312 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
|
|
313
|
|
314 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
|
|
315 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
|
|
316 after each match to get the replacement text.
|
|
317
|
|
318 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
|
|
319
|
|
320 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
|
|
321 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
|
|
322 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
|
|
323 by setting the following variable:
|
|
324
|
|
325 - User option: max-mini-window-height
|
|
326
|
|
327 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
|
|
328 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
|
|
329 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
|
|
330
|
|
331 Default is 0.25.
|
|
332
|
|
333 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
|
|
334
|
|
335 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
|
|
336 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
|
|
337 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
|
|
338 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
|
|
339 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
|
|
340 can be edited from that buffer.
|
|
341
|
|
342 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
|
|
343 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
|
|
344 `A' to use all marked entries).
|
|
345
|
|
346 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
|
|
347 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
|
|
348
|
|
349 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
|
|
350 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
|
|
351 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
|
|
352 been cited.
|
|
353
|
|
354 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
|
|
355 has the following new features:
|
|
356
|
|
357 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
|
|
358 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
|
|
359 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
|
|
360 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
|
|
361
|
|
362 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
|
|
363 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
|
|
364 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
|
|
365 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
|
|
366 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
|
|
367 defaults to 1.
|
|
368
|
|
369 ** Tooltips.
|
|
370
|
|
371 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
|
|
372 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
|
|
373 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
|
|
374
|
|
375 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
|
|
376 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
|
|
377 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
|
|
378 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
|
|
379
|
|
380 ** Customize changes
|
|
381
|
|
382 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
|
|
383 `State' menu to add comments.
|
|
384
|
|
385 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
|
|
386 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
|
|
387 default).
|
|
388
|
|
389 ** New features in evaluation commands
|
|
390
|
|
391 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
|
|
392 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
|
|
393 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
|
|
394 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
|
|
395 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
|
|
396
|
|
397 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
|
|
398 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
|
|
399 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
|
|
400 start sequences.
|
|
401
|
|
402 ** Dired changes
|
|
403
|
|
404 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
|
|
405 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
|
|
406 is, delete only empty directories.
|
|
407
|
|
408 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
|
|
409 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
|
|
410 copy directories recursively.
|
|
411
|
|
412 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
|
|
413 use the -f option when sending mail.
|
|
414
|
|
415 ** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
|
|
416 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
|
|
417
|
25929
|
418 ** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
|
|
419 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
|
|
420 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
|
|
421
|
25984
|
422 ** Shell script mode changes.
|
|
423
|
|
424 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
|
|
425 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
|
|
426 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
|
|
427
|
25853
|
428 ** New modes and packages
|
|
429
|
|
430 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
|
|
431
|
|
432 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
|
|
433
|
|
434 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
|
|
435
|
|
436 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
|
|
437 Pascal) language.
|
|
438
|
|
439 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
|
|
440 the text at point.
|
|
441
|
|
442 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
|
|
443
|
25862
|
444 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
|
|
445
|
25853
|
446 *** whitespace.el ???
|
|
447
|
|
448 ** Withdrawn packages
|
|
449
|
|
450 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
|
|
451 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
|
|
452
|
|
453 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
|
|
454
|
|
455 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
|
|
456 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
|
|
457 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
|
|
458 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
|
|
459
|
25910
|
460 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
|
|
461 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
|
|
462
|
25853
|
463 ** New function `propertize'
|
|
464
|
|
465 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
|
|
466 strings with text properties.
|
|
467
|
|
468 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
|
|
469
|
|
470 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
|
|
471 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
|
|
472 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
|
|
473 specified value of that property. Example:
|
|
474
|
|
475 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
|
|
476
|
|
477 +++
|
|
478 ** push and pop macros.
|
|
479
|
|
480 A simple version of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
|
|
481 is now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
|
|
482 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
|
|
483
|
|
484 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
|
|
485 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
|
|
486 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
|
|
487
|
|
488 +++
|
|
489 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
|
|
490 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
|
|
491
|
|
492 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
|
|
493 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
|
|
494 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
|
|
495 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
|
|
496 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
|
|
497 space, and DEL.
|
|
498 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
|
|
499 and DEL.
|
|
500 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
|
|
501 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
|
|
502 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
|
|
503 [:alpha:] matches letters.
|
|
504 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
|
|
505 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
|
|
506 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
|
|
507 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
|
|
508 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
|
|
509 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
|
|
510 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
|
|
511 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
|
|
512 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
|
|
513 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
|
|
514 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
|
|
515
|
|
516 +++
|
|
517 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
|
|
518
|
|
519 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
|
|
520
|
|
521 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
|
|
522
|
|
523 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
|
|
524 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
|
|
525
|
|
526 :test TEST
|
|
527
|
|
528 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
|
|
529 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
|
|
530 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
|
|
531
|
|
532 :size SIZE
|
|
533
|
|
534 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
|
|
535 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
|
|
536
|
|
537 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
|
|
538
|
|
539 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
|
|
540 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
|
|
541 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
|
|
542 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
|
|
543 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
|
|
544
|
|
545 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
|
|
546
|
|
547 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
|
|
548 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
|
|
549 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
|
|
550
|
|
551 :weakness WEAK
|
|
552
|
|
553 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
|
|
554 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
|
|
555 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
|
|
556 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
|
|
557
|
|
558 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
|
|
559
|
|
560 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
|
|
561
|
|
562 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
|
|
563
|
|
564 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
|
|
565
|
|
566 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
|
|
567
|
|
568 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
|
|
569 values are shared.
|
|
570
|
|
571 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
|
|
572
|
|
573 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
|
|
574
|
|
575 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
|
|
576
|
|
577 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
|
|
578
|
|
579 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
|
|
580
|
|
581 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
|
|
582
|
|
583 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
|
|
584
|
|
585 Returns the size of TABLE.
|
|
586
|
|
587 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
|
|
588
|
|
589 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
|
|
590
|
|
591 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
|
|
592
|
|
593 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
|
|
594
|
|
595 - Function: clrhash TABLE
|
|
596
|
|
597 Clear TABLE.
|
|
598
|
|
599 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
|
|
600
|
|
601 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
|
|
602 not found.
|
|
603
|
|
604 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
|
|
605
|
|
606 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
|
|
607 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
|
|
608
|
|
609 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
|
|
610
|
|
611 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
|
|
612
|
|
613 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
|
|
614
|
|
615 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
|
|
616 arguments KEY and VALUE.
|
|
617
|
|
618 - Function: sxhash OBJ
|
|
619
|
|
620 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
|
|
621
|
|
622 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
|
|
623
|
|
624 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
|
|
625 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
|
|
626 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
|
|
627 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
|
|
628 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
|
|
629
|
|
630 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
|
|
631
|
|
632 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
|
|
633 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
|
|
634 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
|
|
635
|
|
636 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
|
|
637 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
|
|
638
|
|
639 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
|
|
640 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
|
|
641
|
|
642 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
|
|
643 (sxhash (upcase a)))
|
|
644
|
|
645 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
|
|
646 'case-fold-string-hash))
|
|
647
|
|
648 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
|
|
649
|
|
650 +++
|
|
651 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
|
|
652
|
|
653 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
|
|
654 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
|
|
655 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
|
|
656
|
|
657 +++
|
|
658 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
|
|
659
|
|
660 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
|
|
661 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
|
|
662
|
|
663 You can also do several calls to print functions using a common
|
|
664 set of #N= constructs; here is how.
|
|
665
|
|
666 (let ((print-circle t)
|
|
667 (print-continuous-numbering t)
|
|
668 print-number-table)
|
|
669 (print1 ...)
|
|
670 (print1 ...)
|
|
671 ...)
|
|
672
|
|
673 +++
|
|
674 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
|
|
675 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
|
|
676 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
|
|
677 is too short to reach that column.
|
|
678
|
|
679 +++
|
|
680 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
|
|
681 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
|
|
682 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
|
|
683 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
|
|
684
|
|
685 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
|
|
686 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
|
|
687 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
|
|
688
|
|
689 +++
|
|
690 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
|
|
691 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
|
|
692
|
|
693 +++
|
|
694 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
|
|
695 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
|
|
696
|
|
697 +++
|
|
698 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
|
|
699 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
|
|
700 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
|
|
701 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
|
|
702 temporary-file-directory instead.
|
|
703
|
|
704 +++
|
|
705 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
|
|
706 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
|
|
707 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
|
|
708 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
|
|
709
|
|
710 +++
|
|
711 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
|
|
712 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
|
|
713
|
|
714 +++
|
|
715 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
|
|
716
|
|
717 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
|
|
718 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
|
|
719 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
|
|
720
|
|
721 +++
|
|
722 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
|
|
723
|
|
724 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
|
|
725 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
|
|
726 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
|
|
727 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
|
|
728 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
|
|
729 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
|
|
730
|
|
731 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
|
|
732 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
|
|
733 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
|
|
734 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
|
|
735
|
|
736 +++
|
|
737 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
|
|
738
|
|
739 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
|
|
740 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
|
|
741 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
|
|
742 result string.
|
|
743
|
|
744 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
|
|
745 string where arguments appear in the result string.
|
|
746
|
|
747 Example:
|
|
748
|
|
749 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
|
|
750 (s2 "world"))
|
|
751 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
|
|
752 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
|
|
753 (format s1 s2)
|
|
754
|
|
755 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
|
|
756
|
|
757 +++
|
|
758 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
|
|
759
|
|
760 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
|
|
761 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
|
|
762 argument in it.
|
|
763
|
|
764 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
|
|
765 (arg "world"))
|
|
766 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
|
|
767 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
|
|
768 (message msg arg))
|
|
769
|
|
770 +++
|
|
771 ** Sound support
|
|
772
|
|
773 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
|
|
774 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
|
|
775
|
|
776 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
|
|
777 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
|
|
778 to enable sound support.
|
|
779
|
|
780 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
|
|
781 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
|
|
782 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
|
|
783 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
|
|
784 sound to play, before playing the sound.
|
|
785
|
|
786 The following sound properties are supported:
|
|
787
|
|
788 - `:file FILE'
|
|
789
|
|
790 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
|
|
791 searched relative to `data-directory'.
|
|
792
|
|
793 - `:volume VOLUME'
|
|
794
|
|
795 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
|
|
796 0..1. This property is optional.
|
|
797
|
|
798 Other properties are ignored.
|
|
799
|
|
800 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
|
|
801
|
|
802 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
|
|
803
|
|
804 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
|
|
805 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
|
|
806 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
|
|
807 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
|
|
808
|
|
809 ** New face implementation.
|
|
810
|
|
811 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
|
|
812 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
|
|
813
|
|
814 +++
|
|
815 *** New faces.
|
|
816
|
|
817 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
|
|
818
|
|
819 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
|
|
820
|
|
821 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
|
|
822 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
|
|
823
|
|
824 3. Font height in 1/10pt
|
|
825
|
|
826 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
|
|
827
|
|
828 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
|
|
829
|
|
830 6. Foreground color.
|
|
831
|
|
832 7. Background color.
|
|
833
|
|
834 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
|
|
835
|
|
836 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
|
|
837
|
|
838 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
|
|
839
|
|
840 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
|
|
841
|
|
842 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
|
|
843 color.
|
|
844
|
|
845 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
|
|
846 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
|
|
847
|
|
848 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
|
|
849 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
|
|
850 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
|
|
851 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
|
|
852 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
|
|
853 attributes mentioned above.
|
|
854
|
|
855 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
|
|
856 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
|
|
857 created frames.
|
|
858
|
|
859 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
|
|
860 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
|
|
861 `fully-specified'.
|
|
862
|
|
863 +++
|
|
864 *** Face merging.
|
|
865
|
|
866 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
|
|
867 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
|
|
868 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
|
|
869 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
|
|
870 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
|
|
871 results in a fully-specified face.
|
|
872
|
|
873 +++
|
|
874 *** Face realization.
|
|
875
|
|
876 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
|
|
877 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
|
|
878 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
|
|
879 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
|
|
880 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
|
|
881 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
|
|
882
|
|
883 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
|
|
884 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
|
|
885 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
|
|
886 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
|
|
887
|
|
888 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
|
|
889 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
|
|
890 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
|
|
891 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
|
|
892 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
|
|
893
|
|
894 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
|
|
895 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
|
|
896 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
|
|
897 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
|
|
898 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
|
|
899 Emacs.
|
|
900
|
|
901 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
|
|
902 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
|
|
903 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
|
|
904 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
|
|
905
|
|
906 ++++
|
|
907 **** Clearing face caches.
|
|
908
|
|
909 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
|
|
910 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
|
|
911 unused fonts.
|
|
912
|
|
913 +++
|
|
914 *** Font selection.
|
|
915
|
|
916 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
|
|
917 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
|
|
918 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
|
|
919
|
|
920 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
|
|
921 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
|
|
922 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
|
|
923 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
|
|
924 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
|
|
925
|
|
926 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
|
|
927 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
|
|
928 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
|
|
929
|
|
930 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
|
|
931
|
|
932 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
|
|
933 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
|
|
934 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
|
|
935 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
|
|
936 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
|
|
937 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
|
|
938 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
|
|
939
|
|
940 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
|
|
941 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
|
|
942 face doesn't exist.
|
|
943
|
|
944 +++
|
|
945 **** Scalable fonts
|
|
946
|
|
947 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
|
|
948 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
|
|
949 servers.
|
|
950
|
|
951 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
|
|
952 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means nver use
|
|
953 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
|
|
954 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
|
|
955 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
|
|
956 that list. Example:
|
|
957
|
|
958 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
|
|
959
|
|
960 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
|
|
961
|
|
962 +++
|
|
963 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
|
|
964
|
|
965 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
|
|
966
|
|
967 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
|
|
968 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
|
|
969 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
|
|
970
|
|
971 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
|
|
972 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
|
|
973 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
|
|
974 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
|
|
975 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
|
|
976 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
|
|
977 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
|
|
978 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
|
|
979 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
|
|
980 of the face font sort order.
|
|
981
|
|
982 - Function: x-font-family-list
|
|
983
|
|
984 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
|
|
985 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
|
|
986 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
|
|
987 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
|
|
988
|
|
989 - Variable: font-list-limit
|
|
990
|
|
991 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
|
|
992 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
|
|
993 matching font. The default is currently 100.
|
|
994
|
|
995 +++
|
|
996 *** Setting face attributes.
|
|
997
|
|
998 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
|
|
999 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
|
|
1000 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
|
|
1001 `face-attribute'.
|
|
1002
|
|
1003 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
|
|
1004 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
|
|
1005
|
|
1006 The following attributes are recognized:
|
|
1007
|
|
1008 `:family'
|
|
1009
|
|
1010 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
|
|
1011 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
|
|
1012 and `?' are allowed.
|
|
1013
|
|
1014 `:width'
|
|
1015
|
|
1016 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
|
|
1017 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
|
|
1018 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
|
|
1019 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
|
|
1020
|
|
1021 `:height'
|
|
1022
|
|
1023 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
|
|
1024 1/10 pt.
|
|
1025
|
|
1026 `:weight'
|
|
1027
|
|
1028 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
|
|
1029 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
|
|
1030 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
|
|
1031
|
|
1032 `:slant'
|
|
1033
|
|
1034 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
|
|
1035 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
|
|
1036 `reverse-oblique'.
|
|
1037
|
|
1038 `:foreground', `:background'
|
|
1039
|
|
1040 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
|
|
1041
|
|
1042 `:underline'
|
|
1043
|
|
1044 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
|
|
1045 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
|
|
1046 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
|
|
1047 don't underline.
|
|
1048
|
|
1049 `:overline'
|
|
1050
|
|
1051 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
|
|
1052 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
|
|
1053 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
|
|
1054 overline.
|
|
1055
|
|
1056 `:strike-through'
|
|
1057
|
|
1058 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
|
|
1059 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
|
|
1060 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
|
|
1061 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
|
|
1062
|
|
1063 `:box'
|
|
1064
|
|
1065 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
|
|
1066 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
|
|
1067 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
|
|
1068 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
|
|
1069 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
|
|
1070 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
|
|
1071 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
|
|
1072 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
|
|
1073 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
|
|
1074 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
|
|
1075 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
|
|
1076 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
|
|
1077 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
|
|
1078 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
|
|
1079 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
|
|
1080 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
|
|
1081 box.
|
|
1082
|
|
1083 `:inverse-video'
|
|
1084
|
|
1085 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
|
|
1086 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
|
|
1087
|
|
1088 `:stipple'
|
|
1089
|
|
1090 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
|
|
1091 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
|
|
1092 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
|
|
1093 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
|
|
1094 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
|
|
1095 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
|
|
1096
|
|
1097 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
|
|
1098 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
|
|
1099
|
|
1100 `:font'
|
|
1101
|
|
1102 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
|
|
1103 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
|
|
1104 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
|
|
1105 versions of Emacs.
|
|
1106
|
|
1107 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
|
|
1108 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
|
|
1109 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
|
|
1110
|
|
1111 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
|
|
1112 `defface'.
|
|
1113
|
|
1114 *** Face attributes and X resources
|
|
1115
|
|
1116 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
|
|
1117 from X resources:
|
|
1118
|
|
1119 Face attribute X resource class
|
|
1120 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
1121 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
|
|
1122 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
|
|
1123 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
|
|
1124 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
|
|
1125 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
|
|
1126 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
|
|
1127 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
|
|
1128 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
|
|
1129 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
|
|
1130 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
|
|
1131 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
|
|
1132 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
|
|
1133 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
|
|
1134 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
|
|
1135 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
|
|
1136 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
|
|
1137 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
|
|
1138 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
|
|
1139 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
|
|
1140
|
|
1141 +++
|
|
1142 *** Text property `face'.
|
|
1143
|
|
1144 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
|
|
1145 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
|
|
1146 specification can be
|
|
1147
|
|
1148 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
|
|
1149
|
|
1150 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
|
|
1151 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
|
|
1152 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
|
|
1153 for face attribute names.
|
|
1154
|
|
1155 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
|
|
1156 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
|
|
1157 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
|
|
1158
|
|
1159 +++
|
|
1160 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
|
|
1161
|
|
1162 The function `face-register-tty-color' can be used to define colors
|
|
1163 for use on TTY frames. It maps a color name to a color number on the
|
|
1164 terminal. Emacs defines a couple of default color mappings by
|
|
1165 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
|
|
1166 `tty-defined-colors'. The function `face-clear-tty-colors' can be
|
|
1167 used to clear the mapping table.
|
|
1168
|
|
1169 +++
|
|
1170 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
|
|
1171 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
|
|
1172
|
|
1173 A number of functions such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
|
|
1174 forward-paragraph, and beginning-of-line, stop moving when they
|
|
1175 come to the boundary between the prompt and the actual contents.
|
|
1176 The function erase-buffer does not delete the prompt.
|
|
1177
|
|
1178 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
|
|
1179 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
|
|
1180 Otherwise, it returns zero.
|
|
1181
|
|
1182 The function buffer-string does not return the portion of the
|
|
1183 mini-buffer belonging to the prompt; buffer-substring does.
|
|
1184
|
|
1185 +++
|
|
1186 ** Image support.
|
|
1187
|
|
1188 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
|
|
1189 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
|
|
1190 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
|
|
1191 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
|
|
1192
|
|
1193 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
|
|
1194 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
|
|
1195 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
|
|
1196 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
|
|
1197 area.
|
|
1198
|
|
1199 IMAGE is an image specification.
|
|
1200
|
|
1201 *** Image specifications
|
|
1202
|
|
1203 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
|
|
1204 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
|
|
1205 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
|
|
1206 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'.
|
|
1207
|
|
1208 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
|
|
1209
|
|
1210 `:ascent ASCENT'
|
|
1211
|
|
1212 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
|
|
1213 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
|
|
1214
|
|
1215 `:margin MARGIN'
|
|
1216
|
|
1217 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
|
|
1218 margin around the image. Default is 0.
|
|
1219
|
|
1220 `:relief RELIEF'
|
|
1221
|
|
1222 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
|
|
1223 around an image.
|
|
1224
|
|
1225 `:algorithm ALGO'
|
|
1226
|
|
1227 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
|
|
1228 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
|
|
1229 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
|
|
1230 which is intended to display images "disabled."
|
|
1231
|
|
1232 `:heuristic-mask BG'
|
|
1233
|
|
1234 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
|
|
1235 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
|
|
1236 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
|
|
1237 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
|
|
1238 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
|
|
1239 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
|
|
1240 background of the image.
|
|
1241
|
|
1242 `:file FILE'
|
|
1243
|
|
1244 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
|
|
1245 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
|
|
1246 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
|
|
1247 may be present in the image specification.
|
|
1248
|
|
1249
|
|
1250 *** Supported image types
|
|
1251
|
|
1252 **** XBM, iamge type `xbm'.
|
|
1253
|
|
1254 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
|
|
1255 properties supported are
|
|
1256
|
|
1257 `:foreground FG'
|
|
1258
|
|
1259 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
|
|
1260 is the frame's foreground.
|
|
1261
|
|
1262 `:background FG'
|
|
1263
|
|
1264 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
|
|
1265 the frame's background color.
|
|
1266
|
|
1267 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
|
|
1268 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
|
|
1269 instead of a `:file' property.
|
|
1270
|
|
1271 `:width WIDTH'
|
|
1272
|
|
1273 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
|
|
1274
|
|
1275 `:height HEIGHT'
|
|
1276
|
|
1277 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
|
|
1278
|
|
1279 `:data DATA'
|
|
1280
|
|
1281 DATA must be either
|
|
1282
|
|
1283 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
|
|
1284 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
|
|
1285
|
|
1286 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
|
|
1287
|
|
1288 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
|
|
1289 bitmap.
|
|
1290
|
|
1291 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
|
|
1292
|
|
1293 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
|
|
1294 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
|
|
1295 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
|
|
1296 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
|
|
1297
|
|
1298 Additional image properties supported are:
|
|
1299
|
|
1300 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
|
|
1301
|
|
1302 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
|
|
1303 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
|
|
1304 name.
|
|
1305
|
|
1306 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
|
|
1307 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
|
|
1308
|
|
1309 `:data DATA'
|
|
1310
|
|
1311 DATA must be a string containing an XPM image. The contents of the
|
|
1312 string are of the same format as that of XPM files.
|
|
1313
|
|
1314 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
|
|
1315 to display compressed images.
|
|
1316
|
|
1317 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
|
|
1318
|
|
1319 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
|
|
1320 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
|
|
1321 defined.
|
|
1322
|
|
1323 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
|
|
1324
|
|
1325 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
|
|
1326 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
|
|
1327 properties defined.
|
|
1328
|
|
1329 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
|
|
1330
|
|
1331 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
|
|
1332 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
|
|
1333 properties defined.
|
|
1334
|
|
1335 **** GIF, image type `gif'
|
|
1336
|
|
1337 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
|
|
1338 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
|
|
1339
|
|
1340 Additional image properties supported are:
|
|
1341
|
|
1342 `:index INDEX'
|
|
1343
|
|
1344 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
|
|
1345 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
|
|
1346
|
|
1347 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
|
|
1348 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
|
|
1349 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
|
|
1350 every 0.1 seconds.
|
|
1351
|
|
1352 (defun show-anim (file max)
|
|
1353 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
|
|
1354 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
|
|
1355
|
|
1356 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
|
|
1357 (when (= idx max)
|
|
1358 (setq idx 0))
|
|
1359 (let ((img (create-image file nil :index idx)))
|
|
1360 (save-excursion
|
|
1361 (set-buffer buffer)
|
|
1362 (goto-char (point-min))
|
|
1363 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
|
|
1364 (insert-image img "x"))
|
|
1365 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
|
|
1366
|
|
1367 **** PNG, image type `png'
|
|
1368
|
|
1369 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
|
|
1370 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
|
|
1371 properties defined.
|
|
1372
|
|
1373 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
|
|
1374
|
|
1375 Additional image properties supported are:
|
|
1376
|
|
1377 `:pt-width WIDTH'
|
|
1378
|
|
1379 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
|
|
1380 integer. This is an required property.
|
|
1381
|
|
1382 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
|
|
1383
|
|
1384 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
|
|
1385 must be an integer. This is an required property.
|
|
1386
|
|
1387 `:bounding-box BOX'
|
|
1388
|
|
1389 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
|
|
1390 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
|
|
1391 files. This is an required property.
|
|
1392
|
|
1393 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
|
|
1394 lisp/gs.el.
|
|
1395
|
|
1396 *** Lisp interface.
|
|
1397
|
|
1398 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
|
|
1399 which are supported in the current configuration.
|
|
1400
|
|
1401 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
|
|
1402 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
|
|
1403 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
|
|
1404 manually.
|
|
1405
|
|
1406 *** Simplified image API, image.el
|
|
1407
|
|
1408 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
|
|
1409 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
|
|
1410 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
|
|
1411 define an image based on available image types. The functions
|
|
1412 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
|
|
1413 buffer.
|
|
1414
|
|
1415 +++
|
|
1416 ** Display margins.
|
|
1417
|
|
1418 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
|
|
1419 and images.
|
|
1420
|
|
1421 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
|
|
1422 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
|
|
1423 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
|
|
1424 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
|
|
1425 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
|
|
1426 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
|
|
1427 of the display margins.
|
|
1428
|
|
1429 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
|
|
1430 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
|
|
1431 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
|
|
1432 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
|
|
1433 in this file).
|
|
1434
|
|
1435 +++
|
|
1436 ** Help display
|
|
1437
|
|
1438 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
|
|
1439 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
|
|
1440 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
|
|
1441 that have a `help-echo' property.
|
|
1442
|
|
1443 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
|
|
1444 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
|
|
1445 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
|
|
1446 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
|
|
1447 tool-bar item is used.
|
|
1448
|
|
1449 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
|
|
1450 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
|
|
1451 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
|
|
1452
|
|
1453 +++
|
|
1454 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
|
|
1455
|
|
1456 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
|
|
1457 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
|
|
1458
|
|
1459 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
|
|
1460 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
|
|
1461 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
|
|
1462 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
|
|
1463 used.
|
|
1464
|
|
1465 (global-set-key [A-down]
|
|
1466 #'(lambda ()
|
|
1467 (interactive)
|
|
1468 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
|
|
1469 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
|
|
1470 (global-set-key [A-up]
|
|
1471 #'(lambda ()
|
|
1472 (interactive)
|
|
1473 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
|
|
1474 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
|
|
1475
|
|
1476 +++
|
|
1477 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
|
|
1478
|
|
1479 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
|
|
1480 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
|
|
1481 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
|
|
1482 is called with one argument, POS.
|
|
1483
|
|
1484 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
|
|
1485 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
|
|
1486 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
|
|
1487 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
|
|
1488 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
|
|
1489
|
|
1490 +++
|
|
1491 ** Tool bar support.
|
|
1492
|
|
1493 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
|
|
1494 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
|
|
1495 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
|
|
1496 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
|
|
1497 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
|
|
1498 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
|
|
1499
|
|
1500 *** Tool bar item definitions
|
|
1501
|
|
1502 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
|
|
1503 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
|
|
1504 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
|
|
1505
|
|
1506 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
|
|
1507 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
|
|
1508 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
|
|
1509 property (see below).
|
|
1510
|
|
1511 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
|
|
1512 binding are currently ignored.
|
|
1513
|
|
1514 The following properties are recognized:
|
|
1515
|
|
1516 `:enable FORM'.
|
|
1517
|
|
1518 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
|
|
1519 or disabled.
|
|
1520
|
|
1521 `:visible FORM'
|
|
1522
|
|
1523 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
|
|
1524
|
|
1525 `:filter FUNCTION'
|
|
1526
|
|
1527 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
|
|
1528 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
|
|
1529 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
|
|
1530
|
|
1531 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
|
|
1532
|
|
1533 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
|
|
1534 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
|
|
1535
|
|
1536 `:image IMAGES'
|
|
1537
|
|
1538 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
|
|
1539 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
|
|
1540 meaning of each of the four elements:
|
|
1541
|
|
1542 Index Use when item is
|
|
1543 ----------------------------------------
|
|
1544 0 enabled and selected
|
|
1545 1 enabled and deselected
|
|
1546 2 disabled and selected
|
|
1547 3 disabled and deselected
|
|
1548
|
|
1549 `:help HELP-STRING'.
|
|
1550
|
|
1551 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
|
|
1552 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
|
|
1553
|
|
1554 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
|
|
1555
|
|
1556 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
|
|
1557 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
|
|
1558 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
|
|
1559
|
|
1560 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
|
|
1561 raised when the mouse moves over them.
|
|
1562
|
|
1563 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
|
|
1564 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
|
|
1565 pixels. Default is 1.
|
|
1566
|
|
1567 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
|
|
1568 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
|
|
1569
|
|
1570 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
|
|
1571
|
|
1572 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
|
|
1573 a tool bar item. If
|
|
1574
|
|
1575 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
|
|
1576 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
|
|
1577 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
|
|
1578
|
|
1579 is the original tool bar item definition, then
|
|
1580
|
|
1581 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
|
|
1582
|
|
1583 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
|
|
1584 item.
|
|
1585
|
|
1586 ** Mode line changes.
|
|
1587
|
|
1588 +++
|
|
1589 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
|
|
1590
|
|
1591 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
|
|
1592 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
|
|
1593 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
|
|
1594
|
|
1595 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
|
|
1596 a `local-map' text property.
|
|
1597
|
|
1598 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
|
|
1599 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
|
|
1600
|
|
1601 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
|
|
1602 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
|
|
1603 `local-map' property.
|
|
1604
|
|
1605 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
|
|
1606 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
|
|
1607 example.
|
|
1608
|
|
1609 +++
|
|
1610 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
|
|
1611 variable mode-line-format to nil.
|
|
1612
|
|
1613 +++
|
|
1614 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
|
|
1615
|
|
1616 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
|
|
1617 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
|
|
1618 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
|
|
1619 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
|
|
1620 line.
|
|
1621
|
|
1622 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
|
|
1623 `header-line'.
|
|
1624
|
|
1625 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
|
|
1626 position in the header-line.
|
|
1627
|
|
1628 +++
|
|
1629 ** Text property `display'
|
|
1630
|
|
1631 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
|
|
1632 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
|
|
1633 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
|
|
1634 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
|
|
1635
|
|
1636 *** Variable width and height spaces
|
|
1637
|
|
1638 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
|
|
1639 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
|
|
1640 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
|
|
1641 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
|
|
1642 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
|
|
1643 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
|
|
1644 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
|
|
1645
|
|
1646 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
|
|
1647 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
|
|
1648 properties described below.
|
|
1649
|
|
1650 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
|
|
1651 characters having the `display' property.
|
|
1652
|
|
1653 - :width WIDTH
|
|
1654
|
|
1655 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
|
|
1656 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
|
|
1657
|
|
1658 - :relative-width FACTOR
|
|
1659
|
|
1660 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
|
|
1661 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
|
|
1662 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
|
|
1663 width of that character by FACTOR.
|
|
1664
|
|
1665 - :align-to HPOS
|
|
1666
|
|
1667 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
|
|
1668 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
|
|
1669
|
|
1670 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
|
|
1671
|
|
1672 - :height HEIGHT
|
|
1673
|
|
1674 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
|
|
1675 normal line height.
|
|
1676
|
|
1677 - :relative-height FACTOR
|
|
1678
|
|
1679 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
|
|
1680 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
|
|
1681
|
|
1682 - :ascent ASCENT
|
|
1683
|
|
1684 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
|
|
1685 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
|
|
1686 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
|
|
1687 equal to 100.
|
|
1688
|
|
1689 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
|
|
1690
|
|
1691 *** Images
|
|
1692
|
|
1693 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
|
|
1694 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
|
|
1695 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
|
|
1696 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
|
|
1697 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
|
|
1698 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
|
|
1699 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
|
|
1700 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
|
|
1701 as display specification.
|
|
1702
|
|
1703 *** Other display properties
|
|
1704
|
|
1705 - :space-width FACTOR
|
|
1706
|
|
1707 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
|
|
1708 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
|
|
1709 integer or float.
|
|
1710
|
|
1711 - :height HEIGHT
|
|
1712
|
|
1713 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
|
|
1714
|
|
1715 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
|
|
1716 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
|
|
1717 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
|
|
1718 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
|
|
1719 a font is available counts as a step.
|
|
1720
|
|
1721 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
|
|
1722 as tall as the frame's default font.
|
|
1723
|
|
1724 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
|
|
1725 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
|
|
1726
|
|
1727 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
|
|
1728 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
|
|
1729
|
|
1730 - :raise FACTOR
|
|
1731
|
|
1732 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
|
|
1733 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
|
|
1734 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
|
|
1735 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
|
|
1736 `:height' subproperty.
|
|
1737
|
|
1738 *** Conditional display properties
|
|
1739
|
|
1740 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
|
|
1741 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
|
|
1742 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
|
|
1743 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
|
|
1744 the text having the `display' property.
|
|
1745
|
|
1746 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
|
|
1747 `(:when t SPEC)'.
|
|
1748
|
|
1749 +++
|
|
1750 ** New menu separator types.
|
|
1751
|
|
1752 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
|
|
1753 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
|
|
1754 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
|
|
1755 to specify other menu separator types.
|
|
1756
|
|
1757 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
|
|
1758
|
|
1759 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
|
|
1760 separator occurs.
|
|
1761
|
|
1762 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
|
|
1763
|
|
1764 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
|
|
1765
|
|
1766 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
|
|
1767
|
|
1768 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
|
|
1769
|
|
1770 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
|
|
1771
|
|
1772 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
|
|
1773
|
|
1774 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
|
|
1775
|
|
1776 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
|
|
1777
|
|
1778 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
|
|
1779
|
|
1780 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
|
|
1781 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
|
|
1782
|
|
1783 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
|
|
1784
|
|
1785 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
|
|
1786
|
|
1787 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
|
|
1788
|
|
1789 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
|
|
1790
|
|
1791 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
|
|
1792
|
|
1793 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
|
|
1794
|
|
1795 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
|
|
1796
|
|
1797 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
|
|
1798
|
|
1799 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
|
|
1800
|
|
1801 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
|
|
1802
|
|
1803 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
|
|
1804
|
|
1805 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
|
|
1806
|
|
1807 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
|
|
1808
|
|
1809 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
|
|
1810
|
|
1811 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
|
|
1812 the corresponding single-line separators.
|
|
1813
|
|
1814 +++
|
|
1815 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
|
|
1816
|
|
1817 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
|
|
1818 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
|
|
1819 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
|
|
1820 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
|
|
1821 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
|
|
1822 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
|
|
1823 default foreground is black.
|
|
1824
|
|
1825 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
|
|
1826 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
|
|
1827 `ScrollBarBackground').
|
|
1828
|
|
1829 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
|
|
1830 settings for scroll bar colors.
|
|
1831
|
|
1832 +++
|
|
1833 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
|
|
1834 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
|
|
1835
|
|
1836 ---
|
|
1837 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
|
|
1838 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
|
|
1839 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
|
|
1840 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
|
|
1841 the original window start.
|
|
1842
|
|
1843 ---
|
|
1844 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
|
|
1845 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
|
|
1846 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
|
|
1847
|
|
1848 +++
|
|
1849 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
|
|
1850
|
|
1851 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
|
|
1852 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
|
|
1853 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
|
|
1854 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
|
|
1855
|
|
1856 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
|
|
1857 fixed-width and fixed-height.
|
|
1858
|
|
1859 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
|
|
1860
|
|
1861 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
|
|
1862 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
|
|
1863 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
|
|
1864 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
|
|
1865 temporarily to nil, for example
|
|
1866
|
|
1867 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
|
|
1868 (enlarge-window 10))
|
|
1869
|
|
1870 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
|
|
1871 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
|
|
1872
|
|
1873 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
|
|
1874
|
|
1875 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
|
|
1876
|
|
1877 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
|
|
1878 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
|
|
1879 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
|
|
1880
|
|
1881 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
|
|
1882 is the one that is used.
|
|
1883
|
|
1884 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
|
|
1885 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
|
|
1886 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
|
|
1887 separate from the command's regular output.
|
|
1888 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
|
|
1889 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
|
|
1890 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
|
|
1891 the buffer name.
|
|
1892
|
|
1893 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
|
|
1894 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
|
|
1895 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
|
|
1896 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
|
|
1897
|
|
1898 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
|
|
1899 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
|
|
1900 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
|
|
1901 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
|
|
1902
|
|
1903 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
|
|
1904 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
|
|
1905 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
|
|
1906 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
|
|
1907
|
|
1908 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
|
|
1909 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
|
|
1910 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
|
|
1911 they never ignore case.
|
|
1912
|
|
1913 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
|
|
1914 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
|
|
1915 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
|
|
1916 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
|
|
1917 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
|
|
1918 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
|
|
1919 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
|
|
1920
|
|
1921 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
|
|
1922 the same format that was used in the file before.
|
|
1923
|
|
1924 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
|
|
1925 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
|
|
1926
|
|
1927 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
|
|
1928 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
|
|
1929 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
|
|
1930
|
|
1931 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
|
|
1932 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
|
|
1933 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
|
|
1934 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
|
|
1935 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
|
|
1936 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
|
|
1937 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
|
|
1938
|
|
1939 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
|
|
1940 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
|
|
1941 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
|
|
1942 format. You can now customize these variables.
|
|
1943
|
|
1944 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
|
|
1945 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
|
|
1946 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
|
|
1947 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
|
|
1948
|
|
1949 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
|
|
1950 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
|
|
1951 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
|
|
1952
|
|
1953 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
|
|
1954 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
|
|
1955 doesn't have any effect.
|
|
1956
|
|
1957 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
|
|
1958 not one per buffer.
|
|
1959
|
|
1960 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
|
|
1961 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
|
|
1962 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
|
|
1963
|
|
1964 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
|
|
1965 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
|
|
1966 `auto-show-mode' command.
|
|
1967
|
|
1968 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
|
|
1969 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
|
|
1970 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
|
|
1971 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
|
|
1972 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
|
|
1973
|
|
1974 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
|
|
1975 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
|
|
1976
|
|
1977 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
|
|
1978 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
|
|
1979 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
|
|
1980
|
|
1981 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
|
|
1982 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
|
|
1983 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
|
|
1984 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
|
|
1985
|
|
1986 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
|
|
1987
|
|
1988 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
|
|
1989 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
|
|
1990 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
|
|
1991 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
|
|
1992 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
|
|
1993
|
|
1994 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
|
|
1995 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
|
|
1996
|
|
1997 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
|
|
1998 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
|
|
1999 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
|
|
2000 `?' on other systems.
|
|
2001
|
|
2002 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
|
|
2003 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
|
|
2004 Unix.
|
|
2005
|
|
2006 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
|
|
2007 current codepage when it starts.
|
|
2008
|
|
2009 ** Mail changes
|
|
2010
|
|
2011 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
|
|
2012 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
|
|
2013 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
|
|
2014 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
|
|
2015 buffer-file-coding-system.
|
|
2016
|
|
2017 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
|
|
2018 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
|
|
2019 mail.
|
|
2020
|
|
2021 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
|
|
2022 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
|
|
2023 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
|
|
2024 list of possible coding systems.
|
|
2025
|
|
2026 ** CC Mode changes
|
|
2027
|
|
2028 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
|
|
2029 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
|
|
2030 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
|
|
2031 docstring for details.
|
|
2032
|
|
2033 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
|
|
2034 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
|
|
2035 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
|
|
2036 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
|
|
2037 lineup functions use this feature currently.
|
|
2038
|
|
2039 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
|
|
2040 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
|
|
2041
|
|
2042 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
|
|
2043 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
|
|
2044
|
|
2045 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
|
|
2046 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
|
|
2047 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
|
|
2048 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
|
|
2049 anonymous classes.
|
|
2050
|
|
2051 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
|
|
2052 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
|
|
2053
|
|
2054 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
|
|
2055 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
|
|
2056 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
|
|
2057 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
|
|
2058
|
|
2059 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
|
|
2060 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
|
|
2061 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
|
|
2062 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
|
|
2063 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
|
|
2064
|
|
2065 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
|
|
2066
|
|
2067 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
|
|
2068
|
|
2069 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
|
|
2070 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
|
|
2071
|
|
2072 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
|
|
2073
|
|
2074 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
|
|
2075 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
|
|
2076 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
|
|
2077 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
|
|
2078 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
|
|
2079
|
|
2080 ** Gnus changes.
|
|
2081
|
|
2082 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
|
|
2083 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
|
|
2084 Gnus manual for the full story.
|
|
2085
|
|
2086 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
|
|
2087 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
|
|
2088 group, which is created automatically.
|
|
2089
|
|
2090 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
|
|
2091 values.
|
|
2092
|
|
2093 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
|
|
2094
|
|
2095 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
|
|
2096 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
|
|
2097
|
|
2098 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
|
|
2099 `C-u C-c C-c'.
|
|
2100
|
|
2101 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
|
|
2102
|
|
2103 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
|
|
2104 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
|
|
2105
|
|
2106 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
|
|
2107
|
|
2108 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
|
|
2109 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
|
|
2110
|
|
2111 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
|
|
2112 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
|
|
2113
|
|
2114 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
|
|
2115 control over simplification.
|
|
2116
|
|
2117 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
|
|
2118
|
|
2119 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
|
|
2120 limit.
|
|
2121
|
|
2122 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
|
|
2123
|
|
2124 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
|
|
2125
|
|
2126 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
|
|
2127 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
|
|
2128 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
|
|
2129
|
|
2130 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
|
|
2131 `a' forces normal posting method.
|
|
2132
|
|
2133 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
|
|
2134 -- `W d'.
|
|
2135
|
|
2136 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
|
|
2137 to a non-nil value.
|
|
2138
|
|
2139 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
|
|
2140 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
|
|
2141
|
|
2142 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
|
|
2143 has been added.
|
|
2144
|
|
2145 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
|
|
2146
|
|
2147 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
|
|
2148
|
|
2149 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
|
|
2150 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
|
|
2151
|
|
2152 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
|
|
2153 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
|
|
2154
|
|
2155 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
|
|
2156
|
|
2157 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
|
|
2158 been added.
|
|
2159
|
|
2160 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
|
|
2161 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
|
|
2162
|
|
2163 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
|
|
2164 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
|
|
2165
|
|
2166 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
|
|
2167
|
|
2168 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
|
|
2169
|
|
2170 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
|
|
2171
|
|
2172 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
|
|
2173
|
|
2174 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
|
|
2175 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
|
|
2176 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
|
|
2177
|
|
2178 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
|
|
2179 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
|
|
2180 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
|
|
2181 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
|
|
2182 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
|
|
2183
|
|
2184 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
|
|
2185 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
|
|
2186 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
|
|
2187 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
|
|
2188
|
|
2189 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
|
|
2190 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
|
|
2191 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
|
|
2192 mismatch.
|
|
2193
|
|
2194 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
|
|
2195
|
|
2196 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
|
|
2197 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
|
|
2198
|
|
2199 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
|
|
2200 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
|
|
2201 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
|
|
2202 removed from the label.
|
|
2203
|
|
2204 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
|
|
2205 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
|
|
2206
|
|
2207 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
|
|
2208 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
|
|
2209
|
|
2210 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
|
|
2211 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
|
|
2212 expressions.
|
|
2213
|
|
2214 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
|
|
2215
|
|
2216 ** New/deleted modes and packages
|
|
2217
|
|
2218 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
|
|
2219 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
|
|
2220
|
|
2221 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
|
|
2222 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
|
|
2223 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
|
|
2224
|
|
2225 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
|
|
2226 changes with a special face.
|
|
2227
|
|
2228 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
|
|
2229 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
|
|
2230 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
|
|
2231
|
|
2232 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
|
|
2233
|
|
2234 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
|
|
2235 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
|
|
2236 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
|
|
2237 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
|
|
2238 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
|
|
2239
|
|
2240 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
|
|
2241 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
|
|
2242 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
|
|
2243
|
|
2244 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
|
|
2245 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
|
|
2246 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
|
|
2247 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
|
|
2248 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
|
|
2249 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
|
|
2250 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
|
|
2251 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
|
|
2252 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
|
|
2253
|
|
2254 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
|
|
2255 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
|
|
2256 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
|
|
2257 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
|
|
2258 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
|
|
2259 program.
|
|
2260
|
|
2261 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
|
|
2262 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
|
|
2263 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
|
|
2264 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
|
|
2265 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
|
|
2266 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
|
|
2267
|
|
2268 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
|
|
2269 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
|
|
2270 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
|
|
2271 was not documented clearly before.
|
|
2272
|
|
2273 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
|
|
2274 This includes Tetris and Snake.
|
|
2275
|
|
2276 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
|
|
2277
|
|
2278 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
|
|
2279 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
|
|
2280 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
|
|
2281 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
|
|
2282
|
|
2283 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
|
|
2284 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
|
|
2285 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
|
|
2286
|
|
2287 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
|
|
2288
|
|
2289 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
|
|
2290 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
|
|
2291
|
|
2292 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
|
|
2293 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
|
|
2294 integers.
|
|
2295
|
|
2296 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
|
|
2297 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
|
|
2298 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
|
|
2299 file names and attributes are returned.
|
|
2300
|
|
2301 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
|
|
2302 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
|
|
2303 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
|
|
2304 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
|
|
2305 returns the result.
|
|
2306
|
|
2307 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
|
|
2308 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
|
|
2309
|
|
2310 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
|
|
2311
|
|
2312 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
|
|
2313 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
|
|
2314 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
|
|
2315 optionally.
|
|
2316
|
|
2317 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
|
|
2318 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
|
|
2319
|
|
2320 **
|
|
2321 The new function process-running-child-p
|
|
2322 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
|
|
2323 terminal to its own child process.
|
|
2324
|
|
2325 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
|
|
2326 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
|
|
2327 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
|
|
2328 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
|
|
2329
|
|
2330 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
|
|
2331 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
|
|
2332
|
|
2333 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
|
|
2334 :included is an alias for :visible.
|
|
2335
|
|
2336 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
|
|
2337 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
|
|
2338 to move or copy menu entries.
|
|
2339
|
|
2340 ** Multibyte editing changes
|
|
2341
|
|
2342 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
|
|
2343 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
|
|
2344 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
|
|
2345 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
|
|
2346 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
|
|
2347 (setq char (sref str idx)
|
|
2348 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
|
|
2349 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
|
|
2350
|
|
2351 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
|
|
2352 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
|
|
2353 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
|
|
2354
|
|
2355 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
|
|
2356 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
|
|
2357 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
|
|
2358
|
|
2359 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
|
|
2360
|
|
2361 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
|
|
2362 across the boundary.
|
|
2363
|
|
2364 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
|
|
2365 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
|
|
2366 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
|
|
2367 contains 8-bit characters.
|
|
2368 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
|
|
2369 contains invalid characters.
|
|
2370
|
|
2371 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
|
|
2372 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
|
|
2373 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
|
|
2374 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
|
|
2375 way.
|
|
2376
|
|
2377 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
|
|
2378 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
|
|
2379 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
|
|
2380 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
|
|
2381
|
|
2382 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
|
|
2383 compose Thai characters in a string.
|
|
2384
|
|
2385 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
|
|
2386 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
|
|
2387 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
|
|
2388 menus should always use the third argument.
|
|
2389
|
|
2390 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
|
|
2391 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
|
|
2392 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
|
|
2393 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
|
|
2394
|
|
2395 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
|
|
2396 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
|
|
2397 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
|
|
2398 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
|
|
2399
|
|
2400 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
|
|
2401 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
|
|
2402 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
|
|
2403 echo area contents.
|
|
2404
|
|
2405 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
|
|
2406
|
|
2407 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
|
|
2408 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
|
|
2409 requested feature cannot be loaded.
|
|
2410
|
|
2411 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
|
|
2412 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
|
|
2413 means to clear out that attribute.
|
|
2414
|
|
2415 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
|
|
2416 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
|
|
2417
|
|
2418 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
|
|
2419 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
|
|
2420 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
|
|
2421 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
|
|
2422
|
|
2423 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
|
|
2424 the gap of the current buffer.
|
|
2425
|
|
2426 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
|
|
2427 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
|
|
2428 current buffer.
|
|
2429
|
|
2430 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
|
|
2431 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
|
|
2432 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
|
|
2433 it back in after any modifications have been made.
|
|
2434
|
|
2435 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
|
|
2436
|
|
2437 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
|
|
2438 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
|
|
2439 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
|
|
2440 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
|
|
2441 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
|
|
2442
|
|
2443 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
|
|
2444 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
|
|
2445 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
|
|
2446 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
|
|
2447 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
|
|
2448
|
|
2449 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
|
|
2450 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
|
|
2451 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
|
|
2452
|
|
2453 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
|
|
2454 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
|
|
2455 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
|
|
2456 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
|
|
2457 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
|
|
2458 results.
|
|
2459
|
|
2460 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
|
|
2461 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
|
|
2462 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
|
|
2463 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
|
|
2464
|
|
2465 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
|
|
2466
|
|
2467 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
|
|
2468 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
|
|
2469 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
|
|
2470 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
|
|
2471
|
|
2472 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
|
|
2473 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
|
|
2474 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
|
|
2475 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
|
|
2476 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
|
|
2477 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
|
|
2478 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
|
|
2479 region.
|
|
2480
|
|
2481 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
|
|
2482 selective undo.
|
|
2483
|
|
2484 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
|
|
2485 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
|
|
2486 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
|
|
2487 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
|
|
2488 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
|
|
2489
|
|
2490 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
|
|
2491 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
|
|
2492 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
|
|
2493 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
|
|
2494
|
|
2495 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
|
|
2496 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
|
|
2497 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
|
|
2498 something that most users not do.
|
|
2499
|
|
2500 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
|
|
2501 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
|
|
2502 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
|
|
2503 applications.
|
|
2504
|
|
2505 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
|
|
2506 pasting operations.
|
|
2507
|
|
2508 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
|
|
2509 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
|
|
2510 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
|
|
2511 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
|
|
2512 `ps-printer-name'.
|
|
2513
|
|
2514 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
|
|
2515 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
|
|
2516 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
|
|
2517 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
|
|
2518 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
|
|
2519 hits a new word.
|
|
2520
|
|
2521 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
|
|
2522 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
|
|
2523 to be confused by TeX commands.
|
|
2524
|
|
2525 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
|
|
2526 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
|
|
2527 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
|
|
2528 of various alternative replacements and actions.
|
|
2529
|
|
2530 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
|
|
2531 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
|
|
2532 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
|
|
2533 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
|
|
2534 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
|
|
2535
|
|
2536 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
|
|
2537 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
|
|
2538
|
|
2539 ** Changes in input method usage.
|
|
2540
|
|
2541 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
|
|
2542 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
|
|
2543 respectively.
|
|
2544
|
|
2545 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
|
|
2546
|
|
2547 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
|
|
2548 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
|
|
2549
|
|
2550 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
|
|
2551 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
|
|
2552
|
|
2553 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
|
|
2554
|
|
2555 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
|
|
2556
|
|
2557 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
|
|
2558 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
|
|
2559
|
|
2560 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
|
|
2561 given in the following case:
|
|
2562 o When you are using a complex input method.
|
|
2563 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
|
|
2564
|
|
2565 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
|
|
2566 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
|
|
2567 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
|
|
2568 setting it to t is helpful.
|
|
2569
|
|
2570 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
|
|
2571
|
|
2572 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
|
|
2573 keys:
|
|
2574 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
|
|
2575 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
|
|
2576 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
|
|
2577 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
|
|
2578 environment.
|
|
2579
|
|
2580 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
|
|
2581 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
|
|
2582 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
|
|
2583 get
|
|
2584
|
|
2585 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
|
|
2586
|
|
2587 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
|
|
2588
|
|
2589 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
|
|
2590 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
|
|
2591
|
|
2592 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
|
|
2593 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
|
|
2594 its owner and group.
|
|
2595
|
|
2596 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
|
|
2597 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
|
|
2598
|
|
2599 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
|
|
2600 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
|
|
2601
|
|
2602 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
|
|
2603 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
|
|
2604 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
|
|
2605 by the left edge of the rectangle.
|
|
2606
|
|
2607 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
|
|
2608 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
|
|
2609 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
|
|
2610 for writing keyboard macros.
|
|
2611
|
|
2612 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
|
|
2613 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
|
|
2614 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
|
|
2615 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
|
|
2616 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
|
|
2617 info.
|
|
2618
|
|
2619 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
|
|
2620
|
|
2621 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
|
|
2622 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
|
|
2623 contents only.
|
|
2624
|
|
2625 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
|
|
2626 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
|
|
2627 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
|
|
2628 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
|
|
2629
|
|
2630 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
|
|
2631 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
|
|
2632 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
|
|
2633
|
|
2634 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
|
|
2635 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
|
|
2636 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
|
|
2637 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
|
|
2638
|
|
2639 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
|
|
2640 failure if the command produces no output.
|
|
2641
|
|
2642 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
|
|
2643 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
|
|
2644 the mouse.
|
|
2645
|
|
2646 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
|
|
2647 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
|
|
2648 function and variable names.
|
|
2649
|
|
2650 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
|
|
2651 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
|
|
2652 file-coding-system-alist.
|
|
2653
|
|
2654 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
|
|
2655 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
|
|
2656 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
|
|
2657 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
|
|
2658 according to the current fontset.
|
|
2659
|
|
2660 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
|
|
2661
|
|
2662 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
|
|
2663 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
|
|
2664 nonascii-insert-offset.
|
|
2665
|
|
2666 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
|
|
2667 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
|
|
2668 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
|
|
2669 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
|
|
2670
|
|
2671 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
|
|
2672 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
|
|
2673
|
|
2674 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
|
|
2675 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
|
|
2676
|
|
2677 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
|
|
2678 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
|
|
2679 command keys.
|
|
2680
|
|
2681 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
|
|
2682 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
|
|
2683
|
|
2684 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
|
|
2685 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
|
|
2686 all variables that have documentation.
|
|
2687
|
|
2688 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
|
|
2689 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
|
|
2690 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
|
|
2691 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
|
|
2692 it should show; the default is 20.
|
|
2693
|
|
2694 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
|
|
2695 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
|
|
2696 of your input.
|
|
2697
|
|
2698 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
|
|
2699 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
|
|
2700 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
|
|
2701 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
|
|
2702 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
|
|
2703 Newly added options are included as well.
|
|
2704
|
|
2705 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
|
|
2706 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
|
|
2707 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
|
|
2708
|
|
2709 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
|
|
2710 Customize menu.
|
|
2711
|
|
2712 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
|
|
2713 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
|
|
2714
|
|
2715 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
|
|
2716 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
|
|
2717 invoked.
|
|
2718
|
|
2719 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
|
|
2720 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
|
|
2721 The default is 1.
|
|
2722
|
|
2723 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
|
|
2724 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
|
|
2725 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
|
|
2726 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
|
|
2727 sensibly.
|
|
2728
|
|
2729 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
|
|
2730
|
|
2731 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
|
|
2732 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
|
|
2733 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
|
|
2734
|
|
2735 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
|
|
2736 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
|
|
2737 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
|
|
2738 every night.
|
|
2739
|
|
2740 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
|
|
2741 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
|
|
2742
|
|
2743 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
|
|
2744 read and post multi-lingual articles.
|
|
2745
|
|
2746 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
|
|
2747 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
|
|
2748 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
|
|
2749 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
|
|
2750 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
|
|
2751 made invisible again.
|
|
2752
|
|
2753 ** Mail reading and sending changes
|
|
2754
|
|
2755 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
|
|
2756 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
|
|
2757 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
|
|
2758 toggle.
|
|
2759
|
|
2760 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
|
|
2761 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
|
|
2762 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
|
|
2763 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
|
|
2764 rmail-default-body-file.
|
|
2765
|
|
2766 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
|
|
2767 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
|
|
2768 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
|
|
2769
|
|
2770 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
|
|
2771 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
|
|
2772 is evaluated to insert the signature.
|
|
2773
|
|
2774 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
|
|
2775 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
|
|
2776 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
|
|
2777 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
|
|
2778 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
|
|
2779 especially interested in trying feedmail.
|
|
2780
|
|
2781 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
|
|
2782 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
|
|
2783 provided by feedmail are:
|
|
2784
|
|
2785 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
|
|
2786 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
|
|
2787 there is also a queue for draft messages
|
|
2788
|
|
2789 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
|
|
2790 be prompted for confirmation
|
|
2791
|
|
2792 **** does smart filling of address headers
|
|
2793
|
|
2794 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
|
|
2795 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
|
|
2796 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
|
|
2797
|
|
2798 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
|
|
2799 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
|
|
2800 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
|
|
2801 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
|
|
2802
|
|
2803 ** Dired changes
|
|
2804
|
|
2805 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
|
|
2806 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
|
|
2807
|
|
2808 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
|
|
2809 run Dired on the directory name at point.
|
|
2810
|
|
2811 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
|
|
2812 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
|
|
2813 for a specified regexp.
|
|
2814
|
|
2815 ** VC Changes
|
|
2816
|
|
2817 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
|
|
2818 conveniently.
|
|
2819
|
|
2820 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
|
|
2821 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
|
|
2822 Dired.
|
|
2823
|
|
2824 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
|
|
2825 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
|
|
2826 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
|
|
2827 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
|
|
2828
|
|
2829 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
|
|
2830 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
|
|
2831 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
|
|
2832 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
|
|
2833 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
|
|
2834
|
|
2835 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
|
|
2836 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
|
|
2837 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
|
|
2838 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
|
|
2839 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
|
|
2840
|
|
2841 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
|
|
2842 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
|
|
2843 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
|
|
2844 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
|
|
2845
|
|
2846 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
|
|
2847 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
|
|
2848 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
|
|
2849
|
|
2850 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
|
|
2851 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
|
|
2852 session to resolve them.
|
|
2853
|
|
2854 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
|
|
2855 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
|
|
2856 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
|
|
2857 uses as well).
|
|
2858
|
|
2859 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
|
|
2860 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
|
|
2861 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
|
|
2862 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
|
|
2863 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
|
|
2864 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
|
|
2865 using ediff.
|
|
2866
|
|
2867 ** Changes in Font Lock
|
|
2868
|
|
2869 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
|
|
2870 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
|
|
2871 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
|
|
2872 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
|
|
2873 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
|
|
2874
|
|
2875 ** Frame name display changes
|
|
2876
|
|
2877 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
|
|
2878 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
|
|
2879 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
|
|
2880 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
|
|
2881
|
|
2882 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
|
|
2883 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
|
|
2884 menu.
|
|
2885
|
|
2886 ** Comint (subshell) changes
|
|
2887
|
|
2888 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
|
|
2889 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
|
|
2890 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
|
|
2891
|
|
2892 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
|
|
2893
|
|
2894 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
|
|
2895 that is, the line after the last line you got.
|
|
2896 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
|
|
2897
|
|
2898 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
|
|
2899 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
|
|
2900 the following line.
|
|
2901
|
|
2902 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
|
|
2903 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
|
|
2904 previously sent input.
|
|
2905
|
|
2906 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
|
|
2907 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
|
|
2908 as the search string.
|
|
2909
|
|
2910 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
|
|
2911 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
|
|
2912
|
|
2913 ** C mode changes
|
|
2914
|
|
2915 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
|
|
2916 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
|
|
2917 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
|
|
2918 definition.
|
|
2919
|
|
2920 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
|
|
2921 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
|
|
2922 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
|
|
2923 style is still the default however.
|
|
2924
|
|
2925 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
|
|
2926
|
|
2927 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
|
|
2928 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
|
|
2929 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
|
|
2930
|
|
2931 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
|
|
2932 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
|
|
2933
|
|
2934 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
|
|
2935 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
|
|
2936
|
|
2937 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
|
|
2938 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
|
|
2939
|
|
2940 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
|
|
2941 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
|
|
2942
|
|
2943 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
|
|
2944 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
|
|
2945 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
|
|
2946 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
|
|
2947
|
|
2948 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
|
|
2949
|
|
2950 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
|
|
2951 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
|
|
2952 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
|
|
2953
|
|
2954 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
|
|
2955 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
|
|
2956 expanding dynamically.
|
|
2957
|
|
2958 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
|
|
2959 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
|
|
2960
|
|
2961 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
|
|
2962 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
|
|
2963 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
|
|
2964 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
|
|
2965
|
|
2966 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
|
|
2967
|
|
2968 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
2969
|
|
2970 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
|
|
2971 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
|
|
2972 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
|
|
2973 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
|
|
2974 against the first word in the title.
|
|
2975
|
|
2976 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
|
|
2977 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
|
|
2978 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
|
|
2979 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
|
|
2980 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
|
|
2981 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
|
|
2982
|
|
2983 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
|
|
2984 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
|
|
2985 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
|
|
2986 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
|
|
2987
|
|
2988 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
|
|
2989
|
|
2990 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
|
|
2991 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
|
|
2992 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
|
|
2993 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
|
|
2994 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
|
|
2995 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
|
|
2996
|
|
2997 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
|
|
2998 Editing group once the package is loaded.
|
|
2999
|
|
3000 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
|
|
3001 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
|
|
3002 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
|
|
3003
|
|
3004 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
|
|
3005 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
|
|
3006
|
|
3007 ** Ispell changes.
|
|
3008
|
|
3009 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
|
|
3010 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
|
|
3011 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
|
|
3012
|
|
3013 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
|
|
3014 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
|
|
3015 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
|
|
3016 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
|
|
3017 include:
|
|
3018
|
|
3019 o URLs are automatically skipped
|
|
3020 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
|
|
3021
|
|
3022 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
|
|
3023
|
|
3024 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
|
|
3025
|
|
3026 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
|
|
3027 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
|
|
3028 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
|
|
3029 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
|
|
3030
|
|
3031 *** New recursive parser.
|
|
3032
|
|
3033 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
|
|
3034 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
|
|
3035 recursive parser scans the individual files.
|
|
3036
|
|
3037 *** Parsing only part of a document.
|
|
3038
|
|
3039 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
|
|
3040 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
|
|
3041 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
|
|
3042
|
|
3043 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
|
|
3044
|
|
3045 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
|
|
3046
|
|
3047 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
|
|
3048
|
|
3049 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
|
|
3050
|
|
3051 *** Using multiple selection buffers
|
|
3052
|
|
3053 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
|
|
3054 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
|
|
3055
|
|
3056 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
|
|
3057
|
|
3058 *** References to external documents.
|
|
3059
|
|
3060 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
|
|
3061 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
|
|
3062 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
|
|
3063 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
|
|
3064 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
|
|
3065 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
|
|
3066 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
|
|
3067
|
|
3068 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
|
|
3069
|
|
3070 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
|
|
3071 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
|
|
3072
|
|
3073 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
|
|
3074 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
|
|
3075
|
|
3076 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
|
|
3077
|
|
3078 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
|
|
3079 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
|
|
3080
|
|
3081 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
|
|
3082
|
|
3083 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
|
|
3084 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
|
|
3085 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
|
|
3086 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
|
|
3087 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
|
|
3088 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
|
|
3089 more.
|
|
3090
|
|
3091 *** Support for the varioref package
|
|
3092
|
|
3093 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
|
|
3094
|
|
3095 *** New hooks
|
|
3096
|
|
3097 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
|
|
3098 and citations are created. These hooks are
|
|
3099 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
|
|
3100 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
|
|
3101
|
|
3102 *** Citations outside LaTeX
|
|
3103
|
|
3104 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
|
|
3105 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
|
|
3106
|
|
3107 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
|
|
3108
|
|
3109 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
|
|
3110 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
|
|
3111 fontified, use
|
|
3112
|
|
3113 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
|
|
3114
|
|
3115 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
|
|
3116 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
|
|
3117 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
|
|
3118 directories that contain the same file name.
|
|
3119
|
|
3120 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
|
|
3121 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
|
|
3122 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
|
|
3123 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
|
|
3124 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
|
|
3125 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
|
|
3126 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
|
|
3127 directory.
|
|
3128
|
|
3129 ** New modes and packages
|
|
3130
|
|
3131 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
|
|
3132 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
|
|
3133 it, but some do not.
|
|
3134
|
|
3135 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
|
|
3136 code.
|
|
3137
|
|
3138 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
|
|
3139 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
|
|
3140 around in a buffer.
|
|
3141
|
|
3142 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
|
|
3143
|
|
3144 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
|
|
3145 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
|
|
3146 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
|
|
3147 established system of notation similar to Chess.
|
|
3148
|
|
3149 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
|
|
3150 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
|
|
3151 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
|
|
3152
|
|
3153 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
|
|
3154 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
|
|
3155 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
|
|
3156 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
|
|
3157 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
|
|
3158 the like.
|
|
3159
|
|
3160 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
|
|
3161 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
|
|
3162
|
|
3163 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
|
|
3164 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
|
|
3165 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
|
|
3166 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
|
|
3167
|
|
3168 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
|
|
3169
|
|
3170 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
|
|
3171 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
|
|
3172 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
|
|
3173 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
|
|
3174 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
|
|
3175 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
|
|
3176 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
|
|
3177 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
|
|
3178 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
|
|
3179 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
|
|
3180 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
|
|
3181
|
|
3182 Platform-specific modes:
|
|
3183
|
|
3184 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
|
|
3185 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
|
|
3186 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
|
|
3187 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
|
|
3188 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
|
|
3189 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
|
|
3190 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
|
|
3191 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
|
|
3192 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
|
|
3193
|
|
3194 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
|
|
3195
|
|
3196 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
|
|
3197 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
|
|
3198 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
|
|
3199 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
|
|
3200
|
|
3201 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
|
|
3202 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
|
|
3203 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
|
|
3204
|
|
3205 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
|
|
3206 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
|
|
3207 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
|
|
3208 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
|
|
3209
|
|
3210 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
|
|
3211 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
|
|
3212 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
|
|
3213 environment.
|
|
3214
|
|
3215 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
|
|
3216 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
|
|
3217 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
|
|
3218 current input method for reading this one event.
|
|
3219
|
|
3220 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
|
|
3221 now control whether to output certain characters as
|
|
3222 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
|
|
3223 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
|
|
3224 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
|
|
3225 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
|
|
3226
|
|
3227 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
|
|
3228
|
|
3229 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
|
|
3230 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
|
|
3231
|
|
3232 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
|
|
3233 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
|
|
3234 always increases point by 1.
|
|
3235
|
|
3236 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
|
|
3237 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
|
|
3238
|
|
3239 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
|
|
3240
|
|
3241 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
|
|
3242 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
|
|
3243 default value changed. For example,
|
|
3244
|
|
3245 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
|
|
3246 :type 'integer
|
|
3247 :group 'foo
|
|
3248 :version "20.3")
|
|
3249
|
|
3250 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
|
|
3251 :version "20.3")
|
|
3252
|
|
3253 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
|
|
3254 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
|
|
3255 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
|
|
3256 `:version' in the top level group.
|
|
3257
|
|
3258 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
|
|
3259
|
|
3260 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
|
|
3261 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
|
|
3262
|
|
3263 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
|
|
3264 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
|
|
3265 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
|
|
3266 to themselves.
|
|
3267
|
|
3268 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
|
|
3269 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
|
|
3270 values whatever.
|
|
3271
|
|
3272 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
|
|
3273 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
|
|
3274 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
|
|
3275
|
|
3276 ** Frame-local variables.
|
|
3277
|
|
3278 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
|
|
3279 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
|
|
3280 local bindings for that variable.
|
|
3281
|
|
3282 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
|
|
3283 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
|
|
3284 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
|
|
3285 parameter name.
|
|
3286
|
|
3287 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
|
|
3288 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
|
|
3289 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
|
|
3290 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
|
|
3291
|
|
3292 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
|
|
3293 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
|
|
3294 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
|
|
3295 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
|
|
3296
|
|
3297 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
|
|
3298 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
|
|
3299 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
|
|
3300 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
|
|
3301 See the documentation in sregex.el.
|
|
3302
|
|
3303 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
|
|
3304 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
|
|
3305 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
|
|
3306 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
|
|
3307
|
|
3308 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
|
|
3309 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
|
|
3310
|
|
3311 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
|
|
3312 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
|
|
3313 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
|
|
3314
|
|
3315 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
|
|
3316 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
|
|
3317 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
|
|
3318 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
|
|
3319
|
|
3320 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
|
|
3321 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
|
|
3322 empty input.
|
|
3323
|
|
3324 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
|
|
3325 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
|
|
3326 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
|
|
3327 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
|
|
3328 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
|
|
3329
|
|
3330 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
|
|
3331 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
|
|
3332 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
|
|
3333 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
|
|
3334
|
|
3335 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
|
|
3336 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
|
|
3337 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
|
|
3338 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
|
|
3339 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
|
|
3340
|
|
3341 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
|
|
3342 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
|
|
3343 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
|
|
3344 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
|
|
3345
|
|
3346 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
|
|
3347 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
|
|
3348 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
|
|
3349
|
|
3350 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
|
|
3351 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
|
|
3352 was directed to display this buffer.
|
|
3353
|
|
3354 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
|
|
3355 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
|
|
3356 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
|
|
3357 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
|
|
3358 set-window-configuration.
|
|
3359
|
|
3360 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
|
|
3361 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
|
|
3362 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
|
|
3363 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
|
|
3364
|
|
3365 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
|
|
3366 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
|
|
3367 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
|
|
3368
|
|
3369 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
|
|
3370 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
|
|
3371 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
|
|
3372
|
|
3373 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
|
|
3374 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
|
|
3375
|
|
3376 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
|
|
3377 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
|
|
3378
|
|
3379 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
|
|
3380 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
|
|
3381 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
|
|
3382
|
|
3383 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
|
|
3384 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
|
|
3385 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
|
|
3386 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
|
|
3387
|
|
3388 ** Menu changes
|
|
3389
|
|
3390 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
|
|
3391 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
|
|
3392 better supported.
|
|
3393
|
|
3394 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
|
|
3395 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
|
|
3396 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
|
|
3397 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
|
|
3398 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
|
|
3399
|
|
3400 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
|
|
3401
|
|
3402 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
|
|
3403 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
|
|
3404 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
|
|
3405 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
|
|
3406
|
|
3407 The format is:
|
|
3408 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
|
|
3409 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
|
|
3410 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
|
|
3411 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
|
|
3412 The supported properties include
|
|
3413
|
|
3414 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
|
|
3415 item is enabled.
|
|
3416 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
|
|
3417 item should appear in the menu.
|
|
3418 :filter FILTER-FN
|
|
3419 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
|
|
3420 which will be REAL-BINDING.
|
|
3421 It should return a binding to use instead.
|
|
3422 :keys DESCRIPTION
|
|
3423 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
|
|
3424 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
|
|
3425 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
|
|
3426 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
|
|
3427 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
|
|
3428 keyboard binding.
|
|
3429 :key-sequence nil
|
|
3430 This means that the command normally has no
|
|
3431 keyboard equivalent.
|
|
3432 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
|
|
3433 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
|
|
3434 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
|
|
3435 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
|
|
3436 value says whether this button is currently selected.
|
|
3437
|
|
3438 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
|
|
3439 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
|
|
3440
|
|
3441 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
|
|
3442
|
|
3443 ** New event types
|
|
3444
|
|
3445 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
|
|
3446 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
|
|
3447 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
|
|
3448 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
|
|
3449
|
|
3450 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
|
|
3451
|
|
3452 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
|
|
3453 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
|
|
3454 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
|
|
3455 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
|
|
3456 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
|
|
3457 forward, away from the user.
|
|
3458
|
|
3459 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
|
|
3460
|
|
3461 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
|
|
3462 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
|
|
3463 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
|
|
3464 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
|
|
3465 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
|
|
3466
|
|
3467 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
|
|
3468
|
|
3469 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
|
|
3470 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
|
|
3471 that were dragged and dropped.
|
|
3472
|
|
3473 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
|
|
3474
|
|
3475 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
|
|
3476
|
|
3477 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
|
|
3478 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
|
|
3479 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
|
|
3480
|
|
3481 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
|
|
3482 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
|
|
3483 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
|
|
3484
|
|
3485 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
|
|
3486 in Emacs 19 and before.
|
|
3487
|
|
3488 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
|
|
3489 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
|
|
3490
|
|
3491 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
|
|
3492 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
|
|
3493 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
|
|
3494 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
|
|
3495
|
|
3496 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
|
|
3497 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
|
|
3498 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
|
|
3499 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
|
|
3500 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
|
|
3501
|
|
3502 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
|
|
3503 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
|
|
3504 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
|
|
3505 consistent with the new representation.
|
|
3506
|
|
3507 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
|
|
3508 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
|
|
3509 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
|
|
3510 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
|
|
3511
|
|
3512 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
|
|
3513 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
|
|
3514 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
|
|
3515
|
|
3516 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
|
|
3517 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
|
|
3518 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
|
|
3519
|
|
3520 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
|
|
3521 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
|
|
3522 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
|
|
3523
|
|
3524 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
|
|
3525 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
|
|
3526
|
|
3527 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
|
|
3528 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
|
|
3529
|
|
3530 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
|
|
3531 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
|
|
3532 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
|
|
3533 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
|
|
3534
|
|
3535 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
|
|
3536 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
|
|
3537
|
|
3538 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
|
|
3539 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
|
|
3540 buffer or string being searched.
|
|
3541
|
|
3542 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
|
|
3543 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
|
|
3544 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
|
|
3545 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
|
|
3546 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
|
|
3547 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
|
|
3548 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
|
|
3549
|
|
3550 *** Structure of coding system changed.
|
|
3551
|
|
3552 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
|
|
3553 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
|
|
3554 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
|
|
3555 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
|
|
3556 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
|
|
3557 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
|
|
3558 define-coding-system-alias.
|
|
3559
|
|
3560 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
|
|
3561 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
|
|
3562 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
|
|
3563 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
|
|
3564 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
|
|
3565 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
|
|
3566 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
|
|
3567 `iso-8859-1'.
|
|
3568
|
|
3569 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
|
|
3570 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
|
|
3571 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
|
|
3572 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
|
|
3573
|
|
3574 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
|
|
3575 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
|
|
3576 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
|
|
3577 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
|
|
3578
|
|
3579 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
|
|
3580 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
|
|
3581 This function requires a user interaction.
|
|
3582
|
|
3583 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
|
|
3584 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
|
|
3585 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
|
|
3586 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
|
|
3587 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
|
|
3588 select-safe-coding-system.
|
|
3589
|
|
3590 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
|
|
3591 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
|
|
3592 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
|
|
3593 was done.
|
|
3594
|
|
3595 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
|
|
3596 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
|
|
3597 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
|
|
3598
|
|
3599 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
|
|
3600 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
|
|
3601 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
|
|
3602 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
|
|
3603
|
|
3604 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
|
|
3605 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
|
|
3606 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
|
|
3607 converted.
|
|
3608
|
|
3609 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
|
|
3610 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
|
|
3611
|
|
3612 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
|
|
3613 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
|
|
3614 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
|
|
3615 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
|
|
3616 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
|
|
3617 range of characters.
|
|
3618
|
|
3619 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
|
|
3620 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
|
|
3621
|
|
3622 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
|
|
3623 in the current buffer at position POS.
|
|
3624
|
|
3625 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
|
|
3626 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
|
|
3627 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
|
|
3628 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
|
|
3629 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
|
|
3630 binding input-method-function to nil.
|
|
3631
|
|
3632 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
|
|
3633 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
|
|
3634 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
|
|
3635 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
|
|
3636 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
|
|
3637
|
|
3638 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
|
|
3639 subsequent events of a key sequence.
|
|
3640
|
|
3641 *** You can customize any language environment by using
|
|
3642 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
|
|
3643
|
|
3644 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
|
|
3645 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
|
|
3646 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
|
|
3647 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
|
|
3648 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
|
|
3649
|
|
3650 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
|
|
3651
|
|
3652 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
|
|
3653 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
|
|
3654 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
|
|
3655 tree structure.
|
|
3656
|
|
3657 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
|
|
3658 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
|
|
3659
|
|
3660 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
|
|
3661 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
|
|
3662 in your .emacs file.)
|
|
3663
|
|
3664 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
|
|
3665 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
|
|
3666
|
|
3667 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
|
|
3668 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
|
|
3669
|
|
3670 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
|
|
3671 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
|
|
3672 kills the region.
|
|
3673
|
|
3674 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
|
|
3675 delete the character before point, as usual.
|
|
3676
|
|
3677 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
|
|
3678 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
|
|
3679 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
|
|
3680
|
|
3681 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
|
|
3682 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
|
|
3683 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
|
|
3684 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
|
|
3685 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
|
|
3686 past.)
|
|
3687
|
|
3688 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
|
|
3689 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
|
|
3690 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
|
|
3691 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
|
|
3692 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
|
|
3693
|
|
3694 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
|
|
3695 and is an alias for it.
|
|
3696
|
|
3697 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
|
|
3698 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
|
|
3699
|
|
3700 ** Scrolling changes
|
|
3701
|
|
3702 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
|
|
3703 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
|
|
3704
|
|
3705 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
|
|
3706 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
|
|
3707 where it started.
|
|
3708
|
|
3709 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
|
|
3710 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
|
|
3711 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
|
|
3712 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
|
|
3713
|
|
3714 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
|
|
3715 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
|
|
3716 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
|
|
3717 recenters the window.
|
|
3718
|
|
3719 ** International character set support (MULE)
|
|
3720
|
|
3721 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
|
|
3722 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
|
|
3723 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
|
|
3724 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
|
|
3725 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
|
|
3726 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
|
|
3727
|
|
3728 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
|
|
3729 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
|
|
3730 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
|
|
3731 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
|
|
3732 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
|
|
3733
|
|
3734 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
|
|
3735 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
|
|
3736 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
|
|
3737 language, to make it possible to type them.
|
|
3738
|
|
3739 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
|
|
3740 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
|
|
3741
|
|
3742 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
|
|
3743 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
|
|
3744
|
|
3745 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
|
|
3746
|
|
3747 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
|
|
3748
|
|
3749 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
|
|
3750 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
|
|
3751 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
|
|
3752 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
|
|
3753 characters for their work until they want to change.
|
|
3754
|
|
3755 *** Input methods
|
|
3756
|
|
3757 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
|
|
3758 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
|
|
3759 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
|
|
3760 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
|
|
3761 support several input methods.
|
|
3762
|
|
3763 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
|
|
3764 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
|
|
3765 work.
|
|
3766
|
|
3767 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
|
|
3768 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
|
|
3769 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
|
|
3770 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
|
|
3771 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
|
|
3772 letter.
|
|
3773
|
|
3774 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
|
|
3775 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
|
|
3776 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
|
|
3777 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
|
|
3778 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
|
|
3779
|
|
3780 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
|
|
3781 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
|
|
3782 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
|
|
3783 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
|
|
3784
|
|
3785 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
|
|
3786 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
|
|
3787 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
|
|
3788 the first guess is wrong.
|
|
3789
|
|
3790 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
|
|
3791 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
|
|
3792
|
|
3793 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
|
|
3794 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
|
|
3795 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
|
|
3796 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
|
|
3797
|
|
3798 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
|
|
3799 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
|
|
3800 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
|
|
3801 translate automatically to and from either one.
|
|
3802
|
|
3803 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
|
|
3804
|
|
3805 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
|
|
3806 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
|
|
3807 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
|
|
3808 what you want.
|
|
3809
|
|
3810 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
|
|
3811 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
|
|
3812 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
|
|
3813 multibyte characters in that buffer.
|
|
3814
|
|
3815 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
|
|
3816 character conversion as well.
|
|
3817
|
|
3818 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
|
|
3819
|
|
3820 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
|
|
3821 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
|
|
3822 requires using many fonts.
|
|
3823
|
|
3824 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
|
|
3825 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
|
|
3826
|
|
3827 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
|
|
3828 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
|
|
3829 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
|
|
3830 you would use a font.
|
|
3831
|
|
3832 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
|
|
3833 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
|
|
3834 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
|
|
3835
|
|
3836 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
|
|
3837 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
|
|
3838 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
|
|
3839 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
|
|
3840 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
|
|
3841
|
|
3842 *** Defining fontsets.
|
|
3843
|
|
3844 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
|
|
3845 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
|
|
3846 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
|
|
3847
|
|
3848 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
|
|
3849 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
|
|
3850 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
|
|
3851 standard fontset are created automatically.
|
|
3852
|
|
3853 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
|
|
3854 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
|
|
3855 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
|
|
3856 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
|
|
3857 name is `fontset-startup'.
|
|
3858
|
|
3859 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
|
|
3860 The resource value should have this form:
|
|
3861 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
|
|
3862 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
|
|
3863 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
|
|
3864 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
|
|
3865 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
|
|
3866 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
|
|
3867 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
|
|
3868 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
|
|
3869 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
|
|
3870
|
|
3871 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
|
|
3872 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
|
|
3873 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
|
|
3874
|
|
3875 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
|
|
3876 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
|
|
3877 following resource,
|
|
3878 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
|
|
3879 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
|
|
3880 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
|
|
3881 Here is the substitution rule:
|
|
3882 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
|
|
3883 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
|
|
3884 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
|
|
3885 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
|
|
3886 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
|
|
3887
|
|
3888 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
|
|
3889 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
|
|
3890 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
|
|
3891
|
|
3892 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
|
|
3893 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
|
|
3894 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
|
|
3895 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
|
|
3896 fontsets.
|
|
3897
|
|
3898 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
|
|
3899 defaults for a particular choice of language.
|
|
3900
|
|
3901 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
|
|
3902 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
|
|
3903 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
|
|
3904 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
|
|
3905 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
|
|
3906 system for new files that you create.
|
|
3907
|
|
3908 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
|
|
3909 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
|
|
3910 whole Emacs session.
|
|
3911
|
|
3912 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
|
|
3913 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
|
|
3914 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
|
|
3915
|
|
3916 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
|
|
3917 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
|
|
3918 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
|
|
3919 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
|
|
3920 coding systems that Emacs supports.
|
|
3921
|
|
3922 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
|
|
3923 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
|
|
3924 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
|
|
3925 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
|
|
3926 is used for *the immediately following command*.
|
|
3927
|
|
3928 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
|
|
3929 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
|
|
3930
|
|
3931 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
|
|
3932 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
|
|
3933
|
|
3934 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
|
|
3935 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
|
|
3936
|
|
3937 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
|
|
3938 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
|
|
3939 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
|
|
3940 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
|
|
3941 of the file.
|
|
3942
|
|
3943 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
|
|
3944 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
|
|
3945 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
|
|
3946 translated into that character code.
|
|
3947
|
|
3948 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
|
|
3949 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
|
|
3950
|
|
3951 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
|
|
3952
|
|
3953 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
|
|
3954 the coding system for keyboard input.
|
|
3955
|
|
3956 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
|
|
3957 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
|
|
3958 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
|
|
3959
|
|
3960 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
|
|
3961
|
|
3962 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
|
|
3963 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
|
|
3964 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
|
|
3965 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
|
|
3966 designed to work with terminals.
|
|
3967
|
|
3968 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
|
|
3969 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
|
|
3970 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
|
|
3971 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
|
|
3972 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
|
|
3973 in the corresponding buffer.
|
|
3974
|
|
3975 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
|
|
3976
|
|
3977 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
|
|
3978 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
|
|
3979 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
|
|
3980
|
|
3981 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
|
|
3982 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
|
|
3983 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
|
|
3984 want to use.
|
|
3985
|
|
3986 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
|
|
3987 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
|
|
3988
|
|
3989 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
|
|
3990 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
|
|
3991 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
|
|
3992 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
|
|
3993
|
|
3994 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
|
|
3995 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
|
|
3996 related information.
|
|
3997
|
|
3998 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
|
|
3999 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
|
|
4000 scripts.
|
|
4001
|
|
4002 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
|
|
4003 information about the support for a particular language.
|
|
4004 You specify the language as an argument.
|
|
4005
|
|
4006 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
|
|
4007 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
|
|
4008 first dash.
|
|
4009
|
|
4010 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
|
|
4011 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
|
|
4012 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
|
|
4013 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
|
|
4014
|
|
4015 A alternativnyj (Russian)
|
|
4016 B big5 (Chinese)
|
|
4017 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
|
|
4018 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
|
|
4019 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
|
|
4020 E euc-japan (Japanese)
|
|
4021 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
|
|
4022 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
|
|
4023 K euc-korea (Korean)
|
|
4024 R koi8 (Russian)
|
|
4025 Q tibetan
|
|
4026 S shift_jis (Japanese)
|
|
4027 T lao
|
|
4028 T tis620 (Thai)
|
|
4029 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
|
|
4030 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
|
|
4031 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
|
|
4032 v viqr (Vietnamese)
|
|
4033 z hz (Chinese)
|
|
4034
|
|
4035 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
|
|
4036 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
|
|
4037 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
|
|
4038 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
|
|
4039
|
|
4040 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
|
|
4041 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
|
|
4042
|
|
4043 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
|
|
4044 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
|
|
4045 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
|
|
4046 Rmail files themselves.
|
|
4047
|
|
4048 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
|
|
4049 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
|
|
4050
|
|
4051 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
|
|
4052 for sending mail:
|
|
4053
|
|
4054 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
|
|
4055 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
|
|
4056 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
|
|
4057 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
|
|
4058 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
|
|
4059
|
|
4060 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
|
|
4061 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
|
|
4062 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
|
|
4063 translations.
|
|
4064
|
|
4065 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
|
|
4066 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
|
|
4067 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
|
|
4068 without any conversion.
|
|
4069
|
|
4070 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
|
|
4071 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
|
|
4072 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
|
|
4073 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
|
|
4074
|
|
4075 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
|
|
4076 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
|
|
4077
|
|
4078 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
|
|
4079 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
|
|
4080
|
|
4081 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
|
|
4082 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
|
|
4083
|
|
4084 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
|
|
4085 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
|
|
4086 in the buffer before point.
|
|
4087
|
|
4088 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
|
|
4089 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
|
|
4090 you are using.
|
|
4091
|
|
4092 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
|
|
4093 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
|
|
4094
|
|
4095 ** File locking works with NFS now.
|
|
4096
|
|
4097 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
|
|
4098 in the same directory as FILENAME.
|
|
4099
|
|
4100 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
|
|
4101 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
|
|
4102 can become a bottleneck.
|
|
4103
|
|
4104 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
|
|
4105 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
|
|
4106 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
|
|
4107 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
|
|
4108 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
|
|
4109 so useful that the change is worth while.
|
|
4110
|
|
4111 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
|
|
4112 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
|
|
4113 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
|
|
4114 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
|
|
4115
|
|
4116 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
|
|
4117 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
|
|
4118 show-paren-mode.
|
|
4119
|
|
4120 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
|
|
4121 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
|
|
4122 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
|
|
4123
|
|
4124 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
|
|
4125 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
|
|
4126 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
|
|
4127
|
|
4128 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
|
|
4129 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
|
|
4130 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
|
|
4131
|
|
4132 ** Changes in View mode.
|
|
4133
|
|
4134 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
|
|
4135 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
|
|
4136
|
|
4137 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
|
|
4138 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
|
|
4139
|
|
4140 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
|
|
4141 previous state.
|
|
4142
|
|
4143 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
|
|
4144 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
|
|
4145
|
|
4146 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
|
|
4147 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
|
|
4148 not just the selected window.
|
|
4149
|
|
4150 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
|
|
4151 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
|
|
4152 turns View mode on or off.
|
|
4153
|
|
4154 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
|
|
4155 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
|
|
4156 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
|
|
4157
|
|
4158 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
|
|
4159 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
|
|
4160
|
|
4161 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
|
|
4162 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
|
|
4163 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
|
|
4164 which version to compare with.
|
|
4165
|
|
4166 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
|
|
4167 blocks if a match is inside the block.
|
|
4168
|
|
4169 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
|
|
4170 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
|
|
4171 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
|
|
4172 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
|
|
4173
|
|
4174 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
|
|
4175 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
|
|
4176 blocks, all of them or none.
|
|
4177
|
|
4178 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
|
|
4179 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
|
|
4180 confirmation first.
|
|
4181
|
|
4182 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
|
|
4183 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
|
|
4184 However, the mode will not be changed if
|
|
4185 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
|
|
4186 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
|
|
4187 not suitable for ordinary files, or
|
|
4188 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
|
|
4189
|
|
4190 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
|
|
4191
|
|
4192 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
|
|
4193 these commands do not change the major mode.
|
|
4194
|
|
4195 ** M-x occur changes.
|
|
4196
|
|
4197 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
|
|
4198 it performs a case-sensitive search.
|
|
4199
|
|
4200 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
|
|
4201 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
|
|
4202 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
|
|
4203
|
|
4204 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
|
|
4205 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
|
|
4206 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
|
|
4207 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
|
|
4208 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
|
|
4209
|
|
4210 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
|
|
4211 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
|
|
4212 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
|
|
4213 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
|
|
4214
|
|
4215 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
|
|
4216 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
|
|
4217 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
|
|
4218
|
|
4219 ** Outline mode changes.
|
|
4220
|
|
4221 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
|
|
4222
|
|
4223 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
|
|
4224
|
|
4225 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
|
|
4226 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
|
|
4227 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
|
|
4228 was already active.
|
|
4229
|
|
4230 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
|
|
4231 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
|
|
4232 get confused by it.
|
|
4233
|
|
4234 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
|
|
4235 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
|
|
4236
|
|
4237 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
|
|
4238
|
|
4239 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
|
|
4240 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
|
|
4241 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
|
|
4242 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
|
|
4243
|
|
4244 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
|
|
4245 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
|
|
4246 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
|
|
4247
|
|
4248 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
|
|
4249 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
|
|
4250 values.
|
|
4251
|
|
4252 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
|
|
4253 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
|
|
4254 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
|
|
4255 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
|
|
4256
|
|
4257 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
|
|
4258 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
|
|
4259 can be. The default value is 30.
|
|
4260
|
|
4261 ** Changes in Mail mode.
|
|
4262
|
|
4263 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
|
|
4264 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
|
|
4265 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
|
|
4266 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
|
|
4267 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
|
|
4268 behavior.
|
|
4269
|
|
4270 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
|
|
4271 compose-mail-other-frame.
|
|
4272
|
|
4273 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
|
|
4274 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
|
|
4275 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
|
|
4276 buffer that shows the original message.
|
|
4277
|
|
4278 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
|
|
4279 with separator lines around the contents.
|
|
4280
|
|
4281 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
|
|
4282 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
|
|
4283 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
|
|
4284 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
|
|
4285
|
|
4286 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
|
|
4287
|
|
4288 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
|
|
4289 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
|
|
4290 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
|
|
4291 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
|
|
4292
|
|
4293 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
|
|
4294 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
|
|
4295 /etc/passwd.
|
|
4296
|
|
4297 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
|
|
4298 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
|
|
4299 /etc/passwd.
|
|
4300
|
|
4301 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
|
|
4302 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
|
|
4303 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
|
|
4304 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
|
|
4305
|
|
4306 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
|
|
4307 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
|
|
4308 be taken to be magic.
|
|
4309
|
|
4310 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
|
|
4311 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
|
|
4312 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
|
|
4313
|
|
4314 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
|
|
4315 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
|
|
4316
|
|
4317 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
|
|
4318 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
|
|
4319
|
|
4320 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
|
|
4321
|
|
4322 new key dired.el binding old key
|
|
4323 ------- ---------------- -------
|
|
4324 * c dired-change-marks c
|
|
4325 * m dired-mark m
|
|
4326 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
|
|
4327 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
|
|
4328 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
|
|
4329 * u dired-unmark u
|
|
4330 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
|
|
4331 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
|
|
4332 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
|
|
4333 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
|
|
4334 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
|
|
4335 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
|
|
4336
|
|
4337 ** Rmail changes.
|
|
4338
|
|
4339 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
|
|
4340 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
|
|
4341 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
|
|
4342 each time you run it.
|
|
4343
|
|
4344 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
|
|
4345 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
|
|
4346
|
|
4347 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
|
|
4348 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
|
|
4349 means to move in the opposite direction.
|
|
4350
|
|
4351 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
|
|
4352 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
|
|
4353
|
|
4354 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
|
|
4355 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
|
|
4356 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
|
|
4357 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
|
|
4358 for output.
|
|
4359
|
|
4360 ** Gnus changes.
|
|
4361
|
|
4362 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
|
|
4363
|
|
4364 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
|
|
4365 Gnus.
|
|
4366
|
|
4367 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
|
|
4368 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
|
|
4369
|
|
4370 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
|
|
4371 article mode line.
|
|
4372
|
|
4373 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
|
|
4374
|
|
4375 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
|
|
4376
|
|
4377 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
|
|
4378
|
|
4379 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
|
|
4380 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
|
|
4381 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
|
|
4382
|
|
4383 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
|
|
4384
|
|
4385 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
|
|
4386
|
|
4387 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
|
|
4388 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
|
|
4389
|
|
4390 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
|
|
4391 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
|
|
4392 used to pick articles.
|
|
4393
|
|
4394 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
|
|
4395 another have been added.
|
|
4396
|
|
4397 `M-x gnus-change-server'
|
|
4398
|
|
4399 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
|
|
4400 generating lines in buffers.
|
|
4401
|
|
4402 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
|
|
4403 `M-C-_'.
|
|
4404
|
|
4405 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
|
|
4406
|
|
4407 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
|
|
4408
|
|
4409 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
|
|
4410
|
|
4411 *** Scores can be decayed.
|
|
4412
|
|
4413 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
|
|
4414
|
|
4415 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
|
|
4416 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
|
|
4417
|
|
4418 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
|
|
4419 the native server.
|
|
4420
|
|
4421 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
|
|
4422
|
|
4423 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
|
|
4424 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
|
|
4425
|
|
4426 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
|
|
4427
|
|
4428 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
|
|
4429 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
|
|
4430
|
|
4431 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
|
|
4432 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
|
|
4433
|
|
4434 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
|
|
4435 a group.
|
|
4436
|
|
4437 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
|
|
4438 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
|
|
4439
|
|
4440 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
|
|
4441
|
|
4442 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
|
|
4443
|
|
4444 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
|
|
4445
|
|
4446 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
|
|
4447
|
|
4448 Use the `Y c' command.
|
|
4449
|
|
4450 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
|
|
4451
|
|
4452 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
|
|
4453
|
|
4454 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
|
|
4455
|
|
4456 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
|
|
4457 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
|
|
4458
|
|
4459 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
|
|
4460
|
|
4461 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
|
|
4462
|
|
4463 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
|
|
4464 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
|
|
4465
|
|
4466 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
|
|
4467
|
|
4468 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
|
|
4469 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
|
|
4470 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
|
|
4471 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
|
|
4472 this issue.)
|
|
4473
|
|
4474 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
|
|
4475 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
|
|
4476 particular news group. This can be done by:
|
|
4477
|
|
4478 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
|
|
4479
|
|
4480 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
|
|
4481 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
|
|
4482 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
|
|
4483 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
|
|
4484 for reading and posting).
|
|
4485
|
|
4486 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
|
|
4487 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
|
|
4488 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
|
|
4489 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
|
|
4490 there.
|
|
4491
|
|
4492 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
|
|
4493 default. Here are some of these default settings:
|
|
4494
|
|
4495 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
|
|
4496 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
|
|
4497 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
|
|
4498 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
|
|
4499 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
|
|
4500
|
|
4501 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
|
|
4502 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
|
|
4503
|
|
4504 ** CC mode changes.
|
|
4505
|
|
4506 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
|
|
4507 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
|
|
4508 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
|
|
4509 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
|
|
4510 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
|
|
4511 loaded.
|
|
4512
|
|
4513 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
|
|
4514 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
|
|
4515 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
|
|
4516 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
|
|
4517 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
|
|
4518 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
|
|
4519
|
|
4520 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
|
|
4521 of the current buffer.
|
|
4522
|
|
4523 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
|
|
4524 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
|
|
4525 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
|
|
4526
|
|
4527 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
|
|
4528 style that the Python developers like.
|
|
4529
|
|
4530 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
|
|
4531 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
|
|
4532 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
|
|
4533
|
|
4534 ** VC Changes [new]
|
|
4535
|
|
4536 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
|
|
4537 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
|
|
4538 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
|
|
4539
|
|
4540 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
|
|
4541 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
|
|
4542 developers.
|
|
4543
|
|
4544 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
|
|
4545 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
|
|
4546
|
|
4547 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
|
|
4548 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
|
|
4549 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
|
|
4550 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
|
|
4551
|
|
4552 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
|
|
4553 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
|
|
4554
|
|
4555 ** Calendar changes.
|
|
4556
|
|
4557 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
|
|
4558 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
|
|
4559 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
|
|
4560
|
|
4561 ** ps-print changes
|
|
4562
|
|
4563 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
|
|
4564
|
|
4565 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
|
|
4566
|
|
4567 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
|
|
4568 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
|
|
4569 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
|
|
4570 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
|
|
4571 It defaults to `letter'.
|
|
4572 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
|
|
4573
|
|
4574 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
|
|
4575 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
|
|
4576 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
|
|
4577
|
|
4578 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
|
|
4579 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
|
|
4580 It defaults to 1.
|
|
4581
|
|
4582 *** Horizontal layout
|
|
4583
|
|
4584 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
|
|
4585 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
|
|
4586 All are measured in points.
|
|
4587
|
|
4588 *** Vertical layout
|
|
4589
|
|
4590 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
|
|
4591 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
|
|
4592 All are measured in points.
|
|
4593
|
|
4594 *** Headers
|
|
4595
|
|
4596 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
|
|
4597 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
|
|
4598 margin above the text.
|
|
4599
|
|
4600 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
|
|
4601 framing box is printed around the header.
|
|
4602
|
|
4603 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
|
|
4604 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
|
|
4605
|
|
4606 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
|
|
4607 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
|
|
4608 `ps-header-font-size'.
|
|
4609
|
|
4610 *** Font managing
|
|
4611
|
|
4612 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
|
|
4613 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
|
|
4614 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
|
|
4615 elements to this alist.
|
|
4616
|
|
4617 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
|
|
4618 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
|
|
4619
|
|
4620 ** hideshow changes.
|
|
4621
|
|
4622 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
|
|
4623 C++, ; for lisp).
|
|
4624
|
|
4625 *** Support for java-mode added.
|
|
4626
|
|
4627 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
|
|
4628 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
|
|
4629
|
|
4630 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
|
|
4631 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
|
|
4632 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
|
|
4633
|
|
4634 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
|
|
4635 robust and a lot faster.
|
|
4636
|
|
4637 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
|
|
4638
|
|
4639 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
|
|
4640 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
|
|
4641 documentation for more details.
|
|
4642
|
|
4643 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
|
|
4644
|
|
4645 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
|
|
4646 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
|
|
4647 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
|
|
4648 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
|
|
4649 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
|
|
4650
|
|
4651 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
|
|
4652 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
|
|
4653 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
|
|
4654 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
|
|
4655
|
|
4656 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
4657
|
|
4658 *** Custom support
|
|
4659
|
|
4660 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
|
|
4661 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
|
|
4662 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
|
|
4663 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
|
|
4664 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
|
|
4665 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
|
|
4666
|
|
4667 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
|
|
4668
|
|
4669 *** Maximum decoration
|
|
4670
|
|
4671 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
|
|
4672 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
|
|
4673 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
|
|
4674 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
|
|
4675 to get the old behavior.
|
|
4676
|
|
4677 *** New support
|
|
4678
|
|
4679 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
|
|
4680
|
|
4681 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
|
|
4682 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
|
|
4683
|
|
4684 *** Configurable support
|
|
4685
|
|
4686 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
|
|
4687 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
|
|
4688 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
|
|
4689 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
|
|
4690 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
|
|
4691 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
|
|
4692 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
|
|
4693
|
|
4694 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
|
|
4695 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
|
|
4696 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
|
|
4697
|
|
4698 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
|
|
4699
|
|
4700 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
|
|
4701 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
|
|
4702 for any mode.
|
|
4703
|
|
4704 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
|
|
4705
|
|
4706 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
|
|
4707
|
|
4708 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
4709
|
|
4710 *** New faces
|
|
4711
|
|
4712 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
|
|
4713 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
|
|
4714 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
|
|
4715 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
|
|
4716
|
|
4717 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
|
|
4718
|
|
4719 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
|
|
4720 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
|
|
4721 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
|
|
4722
|
|
4723 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
|
|
4724
|
|
4725 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
|
|
4726 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
|
|
4727 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
|
|
4728 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
|
|
4729 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
|
|
4730 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
|
|
4731 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
|
|
4732
|
|
4733 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
|
|
4734 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
|
|
4735 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
|
|
4736 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
|
|
4737 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
|
|
4738 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
|
|
4739
|
|
4740 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
|
|
4741
|
|
4742 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
|
|
4743 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
|
|
4744 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
|
|
4745 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
|
|
4746
|
|
4747 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
|
|
4748 settings.
|
|
4749
|
|
4750 ** Ada mode changes.
|
|
4751
|
|
4752 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
|
|
4753 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
|
|
4754 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
|
|
4755 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
|
|
4756 stubs.
|
|
4757
|
|
4758 *** There are two new commands:
|
|
4759 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
|
|
4760 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
|
|
4761
|
|
4762 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
|
|
4763 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
|
|
4764 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
|
|
4765
|
|
4766 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
|
|
4767 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
|
|
4768 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
|
|
4769
|
|
4770 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
|
|
4771 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
|
|
4772 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
|
|
4773 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
|
|
4774
|
|
4775 ** Scheme mode changes.
|
|
4776
|
|
4777 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
|
|
4778 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
|
|
4779 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
|
|
4780 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
|
|
4781 have any effect.
|
|
4782
|
|
4783 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
|
|
4784 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
|
|
4785 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
|
|
4786 variables as buffer-local variables.
|
|
4787
|
|
4788 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
|
|
4789 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
|
|
4790
|
|
4791 ** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
|
|
4792 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
|
|
4793 buffer in Emacs.
|
|
4794
|
|
4795 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
|
|
4796 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
|
|
4797 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
|
|
4798
|
|
4799 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
|
|
4800 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
|
|
4801 the current defun.
|
|
4802
|
|
4803 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
|
|
4804 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
|
|
4805
|
|
4806 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
|
|
4807 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
|
|
4808 necessary).
|
|
4809
|
|
4810 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
|
|
4811 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
|
|
4812 these register values no longer become completely useless.
|
|
4813 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
|
|
4814 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
|
|
4815 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
|
|
4816
|
|
4817 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
|
|
4818 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
|
|
4819 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
|
|
4820 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
|
|
4821
|
|
4822 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
|
|
4823 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
|
|
4824 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
|
|
4825 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
|
|
4826 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
|
|
4827
|
|
4828 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
|
|
4829 since it applies only to the current frame.
|
|
4830
|
|
4831 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
|
|
4832 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
|
|
4833 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
|
|
4834
|
|
4835 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
|
|
4836 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
|
|
4837 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
|
|
4838 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
|
|
4839 instead of just the file you are editing.
|
|
4840
|
|
4841 ** RefTeX mode
|
|
4842
|
|
4843 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
|
|
4844 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
|
|
4845 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
|
|
4846 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
|
|
4847 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
|
|
4848
|
|
4849 C-c ( reftex-label
|
|
4850 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
|
|
4851 knows which kind of label is needed.
|
|
4852
|
|
4853 C-c ) reftex-reference
|
|
4854 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
|
|
4855 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
|
|
4856
|
|
4857 C-c [ reftex-citation
|
|
4858 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
|
|
4859 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
|
|
4860
|
|
4861 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
|
|
4862 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
|
|
4863
|
|
4864 C-c = reftex-toc
|
|
4865 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
|
|
4866 can quickly jump to every section.
|
|
4867
|
|
4868 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
|
|
4869 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
|
|
4870 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
|
|
4871 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
|
|
4872 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
|
|
4873
|
|
4874 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
4875
|
|
4876 *** Info documentation is now available.
|
|
4877
|
|
4878 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
|
|
4879 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
|
|
4880
|
|
4881 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
|
|
4882 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
|
|
4883
|
|
4884 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
|
|
4885 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
|
|
4886
|
|
4887 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
|
|
4888 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
|
|
4889 appropriate functions.
|
|
4890
|
|
4891 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
|
|
4892 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
|
|
4893
|
|
4894 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
|
|
4895 been cleaned.
|
|
4896
|
|
4897 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
|
|
4898 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
|
|
4899
|
|
4900 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
|
|
4901 shall be delimited.
|
|
4902
|
|
4903 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
|
|
4904 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
|
|
4905 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
|
|
4906
|
|
4907 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
|
|
4908 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
|
|
4909 prefixed with `ALT'.
|
|
4910
|
|
4911 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
|
|
4912 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
|
|
4913 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
|
|
4914 documentation).
|
|
4915
|
|
4916 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
|
|
4917 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
|
|
4918 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
|
|
4919
|
|
4920 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
|
|
4921 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
|
|
4922
|
|
4923 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
|
|
4924 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
|
|
4925 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
|
|
4926
|
|
4927 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
|
|
4928
|
|
4929 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
|
|
4930
|
|
4931 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
|
|
4932 from alien sources.
|
|
4933
|
|
4934 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
|
|
4935 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
|
|
4936 crossref entries.
|
|
4937
|
|
4938 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
|
|
4939 region.
|
|
4940
|
|
4941 *** Added support for imenu.
|
|
4942
|
|
4943 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
|
|
4944 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
|
|
4945 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
|
|
4946 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
|
|
4947
|
|
4948 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
|
|
4949 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
|
|
4950
|
|
4951 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
|
|
4952
|
|
4953 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
|
|
4954 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
|
|
4955 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
|
|
4956 as an argument.
|
|
4957
|
|
4958 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
|
|
4959 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
|
|
4960
|
|
4961 ** browse-url changes
|
|
4962
|
|
4963 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
|
|
4964 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
|
|
4965 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
|
|
4966 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
|
|
4967 customization variables.
|
|
4968
|
|
4969 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
|
|
4970
|
|
4971 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
|
|
4972 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
|
|
4973 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
|
|
4974
|
|
4975 ** Changes in Ediff
|
|
4976
|
|
4977 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
|
|
4978 pops up the Info file for this command.
|
|
4979
|
|
4980 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
|
|
4981 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
|
|
4982 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
|
|
4983 directories).
|
|
4984
|
|
4985 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
|
|
4986 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
|
|
4987 files in the same directory.
|
|
4988
|
|
4989 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
|
|
4990 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
|
|
4991 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
|
|
4992
|
|
4993 ** Changes in Viper
|
|
4994
|
|
4995 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
|
|
4996 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
|
|
4997 instead of vip-.
|
|
4998 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
|
|
4999 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
|
|
5000 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
|
|
5001 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
|
|
5002 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
|
|
5003 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
|
|
5004 color when Viper is in insert state.
|
|
5005 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
|
|
5006 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
|
|
5007 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
|
|
5008
|
|
5009 ** Etags changes.
|
|
5010
|
|
5011 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
|
|
5012 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
|
|
5013 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
|
|
5014 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
|
|
5015 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
|
|
5016
|
|
5017 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
|
|
5018
|
|
5019 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
|
|
5020 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
|
|
5021
|
|
5022 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
|
|
5023 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
|
|
5024 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
|
|
5025
|
|
5026 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
|
|
5027 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
|
|
5028 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
|
|
5029 methods and protocols.
|
|
5030
|
|
5031 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
|
|
5032 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
|
|
5033 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
|
|
5034 paragraph name.
|
|
5035
|
|
5036 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
|
|
5037 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
|
|
5038 at least M times and as many as N times.
|
|
5039
|
|
5040 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
|
|
5041 in files has changed slightly.
|
|
5042
|
|
5043 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
|
|
5044 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
|
|
5045 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
|
|
5046 with old time-stamp-format values.
|
|
5047
|
|
5048 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
|
|
5049 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
|
|
5050 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
|
|
5051 reasons.
|
|
5052
|
|
5053 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
|
|
5054 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
|
|
5055 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
|
|
5056 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
|
|
5057 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
|
|
5058 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
|
|
5059
|
|
5060 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
|
|
5061 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
|
|
5062 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
|
|
5063
|
|
5064 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
|
|
5065 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
|
|
5066 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
|
|
5067 recommended now will continue to work then.
|
|
5068
|
|
5069 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
|
|
5070 details.
|
|
5071
|
|
5072 ** There are some additional major modes:
|
|
5073
|
|
5074 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
|
|
5075 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
|
|
5076 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
|
|
5077
|
|
5078 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
|
|
5079 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
|
|
5080 into Emacs.
|
|
5081
|
|
5082 ** New Lisp packages include:
|
|
5083
|
|
5084 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
|
|
5085
|
|
5086 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
|
|
5087 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
|
|
5088
|
|
5089 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
|
|
5090
|
|
5091 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
|
|
5092 in shell buffers.
|
|
5093
|
|
5094 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
|
|
5095 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
|
|
5096 and `elint-defun'.
|
|
5097
|
|
5098 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
|
|
5099 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
|
|
5100 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
|
|
5101 strings or comments.
|
|
5102
|
|
5103 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
|
|
5104 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
|
|
5105 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
|
|
5106 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
|
|
5107 at these points.
|
|
5108
|
|
5109 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
|
|
5110 can visit them by short forms of their names.
|
|
5111
|
|
5112 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
|
|
5113 Emacs Lisp function at point.
|
|
5114
|
|
5115 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
|
|
5116
|
|
5117 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
|
|
5118 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
|
|
5119
|
|
5120 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
|
|
5121
|
|
5122 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
|
|
5123
|
|
5124 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
|
|
5125
|
|
5126 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
|
|
5127 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
|
|
5128
|
|
5129 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
|
|
5130 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
|
|
5131 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
|
|
5132 original place after inserting the copy.
|
|
5133
|
|
5134 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
|
|
5135 on the buffer.
|
|
5136
|
|
5137 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
|
|
5138 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
|
|
5139 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
|
|
5140
|
|
5141 Enable mouse-drag with:
|
|
5142 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
|
|
5143 -or-
|
|
5144 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
|
|
5145
|
|
5146 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
|
|
5147 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
|
|
5148
|
|
5149 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
|
|
5150 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
|
|
5151
|
|
5152 *** ogonek
|
|
5153
|
|
5154 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
|
|
5155 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
|
|
5156 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
|
|
5157 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
|
|
5158 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
|
|
5159 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
|
|
5160 instance) and vice versa.
|
|
5161
|
|
5162 To use this package load it using
|
|
5163 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
|
|
5164 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
|
|
5165 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
|
|
5166 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
|
|
5167 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
|
|
5168 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
|
|
5169
|
|
5170 *** Interface to ph.
|
|
5171
|
|
5172 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
|
|
5173
|
|
5174 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
|
|
5175 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
|
|
5176 these servers.
|
|
5177
|
|
5178 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
|
|
5179
|
|
5180 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
|
|
5181 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
|
|
5182 while the real cursor does not move.
|
|
5183
|
|
5184 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
|
|
5185 for visiting your favorite web sites.
|
|
5186
|
|
5187 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
|
|
5188 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
|
|
5189
|
|
5190 ** movemail change
|
|
5191
|
|
5192 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
|
|
5193 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
|
|
5194 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
|
|
5195 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
|
|
5196
|
|
5197 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
|
|
5198
|
|
5199 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
|
|
5200
|
|
5201 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
|
|
5202
|
|
5203 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
|
|
5204 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
|
|
5205 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
|
|
5206 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
|
|
5207 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
|
|
5208
|
|
5209 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
|
|
5210 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
|
|
5211 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
|
|
5212 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
|
|
5213 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
|
|
5214 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
|
|
5215
|
|
5216 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
|
|
5217
|
|
5218 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
|
|
5219 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
|
|
5220 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
|
|
5221 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
|
|
5222
|
|
5223 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
|
|
5224 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
|
|
5225
|
|
5226 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
|
|
5227 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
|
|
5228 "win".
|
|
5229
|
|
5230 ** Basic Lisp changes
|
|
5231
|
|
5232 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
|
|
5233 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
|
|
5234
|
|
5235 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
|
|
5236 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
|
|
5237 or by the user.
|
|
5238
|
|
5239 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
|
|
5240
|
|
5241 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
|
|
5242
|
|
5243 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
|
|
5244 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
|
|
5245
|
|
5246 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
|
|
5247 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
|
|
5248 its argument.
|
|
5249
|
|
5250 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
|
|
5251
|
|
5252 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
|
|
5253
|
|
5254 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
|
|
5255
|
|
5256 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
|
|
5257 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
|
|
5258 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
|
|
5259 `format' function.
|
|
5260
|
|
5261 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
|
|
5262 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
|
|
5263 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
|
|
5264
|
|
5265 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
|
|
5266 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
|
|
5267 adding one of these suffixes.
|
|
5268
|
|
5269 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
|
|
5270 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
|
|
5271 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
|
|
5272
|
|
5273 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
|
|
5274 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
|
|
5275
|
|
5276 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
|
|
5277
|
|
5278 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
|
|
5279 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
|
|
5280
|
|
5281 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
|
|
5282 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
|
|
5283
|
|
5284 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
|
|
5285
|
|
5286 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
|
|
5287 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
|
|
5288
|
|
5289 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
|
|
5290 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
|
|
5291 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
|
|
5292 works using `save-current-buffer'.
|
|
5293
|
|
5294 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
|
|
5295 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
|
|
5296 of the last form.
|
|
5297
|
|
5298 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
|
|
5299 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
|
|
5300 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
|
|
5301 as the last form.
|
|
5302
|
|
5303 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
|
|
5304 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
|
|
5305 matches.
|
|
5306
|
|
5307 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
|
|
5308
|
|
5309 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
|
|
5310 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
|
|
5311 Then it returns that string.
|
|
5312
|
|
5313 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
|
|
5314
|
|
5315 (with-output-to-string
|
|
5316 (princ "The buffer is ")
|
|
5317 (princ (buffer-name)))
|
|
5318
|
|
5319 returns "The buffer is foo".
|
|
5320
|
|
5321 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
|
|
5322 is non-nil.
|
|
5323
|
|
5324 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
|
|
5325 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
|
|
5326 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
|
|
5327
|
|
5328 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
|
|
5329 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
|
|
5330
|
|
5331 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
|
|
5332 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
|
|
5333 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
|
|
5334 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
|
|
5335 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
|
|
5336 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
|
|
5337
|
|
5338 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
|
|
5339 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
|
|
5340 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
|
|
5341 characters".
|
|
5342
|
|
5343 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
|
|
5344 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
|
|
5345 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
|
|
5346 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
|
|
5347 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
|
|
5348
|
|
5349 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
|
|
5350 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
|
|
5351 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
|
|
5352 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
|
|
5353
|
|
5354 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
|
|
5355 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
|
|
5356
|
|
5357 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
|
|
5358
|
|
5359 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
|
|
5360 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
|
|
5361 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
|
|
5362 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
|
|
5363 guaranteed.
|
|
5364
|
|
5365 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
|
|
5366 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
|
|
5367 character).
|
|
5368
|
|
5369 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
|
|
5370
|
|
5371 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
|
|
5372 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
|
|
5373 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
|
|
5374 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
|
|
5375 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
|
|
5376
|
|
5377 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
|
|
5378
|
|
5379 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
|
|
5380 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
|
|
5381 more than the number of characters.
|
|
5382
|
|
5383 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
|
|
5384 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
|
|
5385 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
|
|
5386 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
|
|
5387 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
|
|
5388 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
|
|
5389
|
|
5390 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
|
|
5391 and returns a string containing those characters.
|
|
5392
|
|
5393 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
|
|
5394 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
|
|
5395 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
|
|
5396 character, sref signals an error.
|
|
5397
|
|
5398 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
|
|
5399 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
|
|
5400 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
|
|
5401
|
|
5402 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
|
|
5403 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
|
|
5404 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
|
|
5405
|
|
5406 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
|
|
5407 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
|
|
5408 to a vector of the characters in it.
|
|
5409
|
|
5410 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
|
|
5411 of a string. You call it as follows:
|
|
5412
|
|
5413 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
|
|
5414
|
|
5415 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
|
|
5416 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
|
|
5417 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
|
|
5418 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
|
|
5419 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
|
|
5420
|
|
5421 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
|
|
5422 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
|
|
5423
|
|
5424 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
|
|
5425 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
|
|
5426
|
|
5427 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
|
|
5428 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
|
|
5429 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
|
|
5430 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
|
|
5431
|
|
5432 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
|
|
5433
|
|
5434 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
|
|
5435
|
|
5436 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
|
|
5437 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
|
|
5438 are not included in the resulting value.
|
|
5439
|
|
5440 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
|
|
5441 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
|
|
5442 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
|
|
5443 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
|
|
5444
|
|
5445 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
|
|
5446 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
|
|
5447 character extends across that column), then the padding character
|
|
5448 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
|
|
5449 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
|
|
5450 column START-COLUMN.
|
|
5451
|
|
5452 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
|
|
5453 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
|
|
5454 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
|
|
5455 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
|
|
5456 changed text, before the change.
|
|
5457
|
|
5458 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
|
|
5459 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
|
|
5460 one character set for each script, not for each language.
|
|
5461
|
|
5462 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
|
|
5463
|
|
5464 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
|
|
5465
|
|
5466 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
|
|
5467 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
|
|
5468
|
|
5469 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
|
|
5470 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
|
|
5471 which identify the character within that character set.
|
|
5472
|
|
5473 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
|
|
5474 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
|
|
5475 opposite of split-char.
|
|
5476
|
|
5477 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
|
|
5478 of all the characters between BEG and END.
|
|
5479
|
|
5480 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
|
|
5481 of all the characters in a string.
|
|
5482
|
|
5483 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
|
|
5484 and specifying coding systems.
|
|
5485
|
|
5486 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
|
|
5487 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
|
|
5488 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
|
|
5489 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
|
|
5490 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
|
|
5491 as what to do about code conversion.)
|
|
5492
|
|
5493 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
|
|
5494 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
|
|
5495
|
|
5496 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
|
|
5497 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
|
|
5498 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
|
|
5499
|
|
5500 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
|
|
5501 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
|
|
5502 to match against a file name.
|
|
5503
|
|
5504 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
|
|
5505 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
|
|
5506 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
|
|
5507 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
|
|
5508 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
|
|
5509 specifies the coding system for encoding.
|
|
5510
|
|
5511 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
|
|
5512 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
|
|
5513
|
|
5514 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
|
|
5515 the coding system to use for network sockets.
|
|
5516
|
|
5517 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
|
|
5518 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
|
|
5519 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
|
|
5520 service names.
|
|
5521
|
|
5522 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
|
|
5523 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
|
|
5524 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
|
|
5525 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
|
|
5526 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
|
|
5527 specifies the coding system for encoding.
|
|
5528
|
|
5529 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
|
|
5530 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
|
|
5531
|
|
5532 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
|
|
5533 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
|
|
5534 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
|
|
5535 start the subprocess.
|
|
5536
|
|
5537 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
|
|
5538 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
|
|
5539 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
|
|
5540 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
|
|
5541 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
|
|
5542
|
|
5543 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
|
|
5544 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
|
|
5545 subprocess.
|
|
5546
|
|
5547 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
|
|
5548 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
|
|
5549 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
|
|
5550 connection permanently or until overridden.
|
|
5551
|
|
5552 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
|
|
5553 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
|
|
5554 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
|
|
5555 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
|
|
5556 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
|
|
5557 system for one operation at a time.
|
|
5558
|
|
5559 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
|
|
5560 files, subprocesses or network connections.
|
|
5561
|
|
5562 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
|
|
5563 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
|
|
5564 The value is a cons cell,
|
|
5565 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
|
|
5566 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
|
|
5567 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
|
|
5568 input to the subprocess.
|
|
5569
|
|
5570 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
|
|
5571 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
|
|
5572
|
|
5573 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
|
|
5574 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
|
|
5575 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
|
|
5576
|
|
5577 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
|
|
5578 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
|
|
5579 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
|
|
5580 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
|
|
5581 customization.
|
|
5582
|
|
5583 Thus, instead of writing
|
|
5584
|
|
5585 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
|
|
5586 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
|
|
5587
|
|
5588 you would now write this:
|
|
5589
|
|
5590 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
|
|
5591 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
|
|
5592 :type 'boolean
|
|
5593 :group foo)
|
|
5594
|
|
5595 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
|
|
5596 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
|
|
5597 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
|
|
5598 for a description of them.
|
|
5599
|
|
5600 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
|
|
5601 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
|
|
5602
|
|
5603 (defgroup ispell nil
|
|
5604 "Spell checking using Ispell."
|
|
5605 :group 'processes)
|
|
5606
|
|
5607 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
|
|
5608 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
|
|
5609 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
|
|
5610 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
|
|
5611 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
|
|
5612
|
|
5613 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
|
|
5614 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
|
|
5615 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
|
|
5616 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
|
|
5617 first-level subgroups.
|
|
5618
|
|
5619 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
|
|
5620
|
|
5621 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
|
|
5622 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
|
|
5623
|
|
5624 ** easy-mmode
|
|
5625
|
|
5626 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
|
|
5627 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
|
|
5628 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
|
|
5629 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
|
|
5630 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
|
|
5631 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
|
|
5632
|
|
5633 ** Text property changes
|
|
5634
|
|
5635 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
|
|
5636 text property.
|
|
5637
|
|
5638 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
|
|
5639 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
|
|
5640 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
|
|
5641 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
|
|
5642 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
|
|
5643
|
|
5644 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
|
|
5645 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
|
|
5646 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
|
|
5647 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
|
|
5648
|
|
5649 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
|
|
5650 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
|
|
5651 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
|
|
5652
|
|
5653 ** Changes in invisibility features
|
|
5654
|
|
5655 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
|
|
5656 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
|
|
5657 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
|
|
5658 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
|
|
5659 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
|
|
5660 make the overlay visible.
|
|
5661
|
|
5662 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
|
|
5663 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
|
|
5664 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
|
|
5665 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
|
|
5666 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
|
|
5667 t when it should hide it.
|
|
5668
|
|
5669 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
|
|
5670
|
|
5671 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
|
|
5672 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
|
|
5673 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
|
|
5674 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
|
|
5675 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
|
|
5676 Here is an example of how to do this:
|
|
5677
|
|
5678 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
|
|
5679 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
|
|
5680 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
|
|
5681 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
|
|
5682
|
|
5683 ...
|
|
5684 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
|
|
5685
|
|
5686 ...
|
|
5687 ;; When done with the overlays:
|
|
5688 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
|
|
5689 ;; Or respectively:
|
|
5690 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
|
|
5691
|
|
5692 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
|
|
5693
|
|
5694 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
|
|
5695 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
|
|
5696 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
|
|
5697 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
|
|
5698
|
|
5699 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
|
|
5700 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
|
|
5701 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
|
|
5702
|
|
5703 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
|
|
5704 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
|
|
5705
|
|
5706 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
|
|
5707 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
|
|
5708
|
|
5709 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
|
|
5710 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
|
|
5711 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
|
|
5712
|
|
5713 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
|
|
5714 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
|
|
5715 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
|
|
5716 determine the syntax type of the character.
|
|
5717
|
|
5718 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
|
|
5719 of the current buffer.
|
|
5720
|
|
5721 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
|
|
5722 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
|
|
5723 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
|
|
5724
|
|
5725 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
|
|
5726 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
|
|
5727 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
|
|
5728 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
|
|
5729 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
|
|
5730
|
|
5731 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
|
|
5732 text property.
|
|
5733
|
|
5734 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
|
|
5735 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
|
|
5736 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
|
|
5737
|
|
5738 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
|
|
5739 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
|
|
5740 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
|
|
5741 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
|
|
5742 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
|
|
5743
|
|
5744 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
|
|
5745 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
|
|
5746 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
|
|
5747
|
|
5748 ** Changes in face features
|
|
5749
|
|
5750 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
|
|
5751 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
|
|
5752
|
|
5753 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
|
|
5754 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
|
|
5755
|
|
5756 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
|
|
5757 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
|
|
5758
|
|
5759 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
|
|
5760 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
|
|
5761
|
|
5762 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
|
|
5763 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
|
|
5764 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
|
|
5765 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
|
|
5766 overlay property).
|
|
5767
|
|
5768 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
|
|
5769 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
|
|
5770
|
|
5771 ** Changes in file-handling functions
|
|
5772
|
|
5773 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
|
|
5774 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
|
|
5775 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
|
|
5776 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
|
|
5777
|
|
5778 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
|
|
5779 begins with ~.
|
|
5780
|
|
5781 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
|
|
5782 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
|
|
5783
|
|
5784 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
|
|
5785 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
|
|
5786
|
|
5787 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
|
|
5788 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
|
|
5789
|
|
5790 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
|
|
5791 character code conversion as well as other things.
|
|
5792
|
|
5793 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
|
|
5794 (formerly it did not).
|
|
5795
|
|
5796 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
|
|
5797 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
|
|
5798
|
|
5799 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
|
|
5800 instead of constant strings.
|
|
5801
|
|
5802 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
|
|
5803 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
|
|
5804 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
|
|
5805
|
|
5806 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
|
|
5807 in the same way as before.
|
|
5808
|
|
5809 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
|
|
5810 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
|
|
5811 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
|
|
5812
|
|
5813 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
|
|
5814 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
|
|
5815 else, and returns nil.
|
|
5816
|
|
5817 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
|
|
5818 directory cannot be listed.
|
|
5819
|
|
5820 ** Changes in minibuffer input
|
|
5821
|
|
5822 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
|
|
5823 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
|
|
5824 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
|
|
5825 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
|
|
5826 ways:
|
|
5827
|
|
5828 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
|
|
5829 It is available through the history command M-n.
|
|
5830
|
|
5831 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
|
|
5832 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
|
|
5833 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
|
|
5834 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
|
|
5835 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
|
|
5836
|
|
5837 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
|
|
5838 argument in this way.
|
|
5839
|
|
5840 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
|
|
5841 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
|
|
5842 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
|
|
5843
|
|
5844 ** Echo area features
|
|
5845
|
|
5846 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
|
|
5847 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
|
|
5848 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
|
|
5849 after the echo area is cleared.
|
|
5850
|
|
5851 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
|
|
5852 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
|
|
5853
|
|
5854 ** Keyboard input features
|
|
5855
|
|
5856 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
|
|
5857 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
|
|
5858
|
|
5859 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
|
|
5860 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
|
|
5861 by keyboard macros.
|
|
5862
|
|
5863 ** Frame-related changes
|
|
5864
|
|
5865 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
|
|
5866 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
|
|
5867 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
|
|
5868
|
|
5869 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
|
|
5870 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
|
|
5871 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
|
|
5872
|
|
5873 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
|
|
5874 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
|
|
5875 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
|
|
5876 in the selected frame.
|
|
5877
|
|
5878 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
|
|
5879 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
|
|
5880 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
|
|
5881
|
|
5882 ** X Windows features
|
|
5883
|
|
5884 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
|
|
5885 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
|
|
5886 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
|
|
5887
|
|
5888 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
|
|
5889 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
|
|
5890
|
|
5891 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
|
|
5892 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
|
|
5893 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
|
|
5894
|
|
5895 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
|
|
5896 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
|
|
5897
|
|
5898 ** Subprocess features
|
|
5899
|
|
5900 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
|
|
5901 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
|
|
5902 automatically.
|
|
5903
|
|
5904 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
|
|
5905 and returns the output from the command as a string.
|
|
5906
|
|
5907 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
|
|
5908 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
|
|
5909
|
|
5910 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
|
|
5911 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
|
|
5912
|
|
5913 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
|
|
5914 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
|
|
5915 goes after the other menu items.
|
|
5916
|
|
5917 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
|
|
5918 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
|
|
5919 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
|
|
5920 are in use.
|
|
5921
|
|
5922 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
|
|
5923 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
|
|
5924
|
|
5925 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
|
|
5926 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
|
|
5927 form.
|
|
5928
|
|
5929 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
|
|
5930 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
|
|
5931 but its hook is still run.
|
|
5932
|
|
5933 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
|
|
5934 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
|
|
5935
|
|
5936 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
|
|
5937 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
|
|
5938 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
|
|
5939
|
|
5940 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
|
|
5941 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
|
|
5942 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
|
|
5943 warned.
|
|
5944
|
|
5945 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
|
|
5946 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
|
|
5947
|
|
5948 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
|
|
5949 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
|
|
5950 functions like display-time.
|
|
5951
|
|
5952 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
|
|
5953 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
|
|
5954
|
|
5955 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
|
|
5956 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
|
|
5957 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
|
|
5958
|
|
5959 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
|
|
5960 if there is an error in compilation.
|
|
5961
|
|
5962 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
|
|
5963 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
|
|
5964 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
|
|
5965 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
|
|
5966
|
|
5967 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
|
|
5968 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
|
|
5969 the *scratch* buffer.
|
|
5970
|
|
5971 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
|
|
5972 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
|
|
5973 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
|
|
5974 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
|
|
5975
|
|
5976 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
|
|
5977 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
|
|
5978 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
|
|
5979
|
|
5980 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
|
|
5981 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
|
|
5982 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
|
|
5983 and compose-mail-other-frame.
|
|
5984
|
|
5985 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
|
|
5986 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
|
|
5987 full name of the specified user will be returned.
|
|
5988
|
|
5989 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
|
|
5990 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
|
|
5991 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
|
|
5992 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
|
|
5993 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
|
|
5994 files at all.
|
|
5995
|
|
5996 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
|
|
5997 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
|
|
5998 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
|
|
5999 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
|
|
6000
|
|
6001 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
|
|
6002 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
|
|
6003 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
|
|
6004 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
|
|
6005
|
|
6006 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
|
|
6007
|
|
6008 ** imenu.el changes.
|
|
6009
|
|
6010 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
|
|
6011 item from menu created by imenu.
|
|
6012
|
|
6013 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
|
|
6014 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
|
|
6015 select one of those items.
|
|
6016
|
|
6017 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
|
|
6018
|
|
6019 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
|
|
6020
|
|
6021 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
|
|
6022 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
|
|
6023
|
|
6024 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
|
|
6025 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
|
|
6026 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
|
|
6027
|
|
6028 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
|
|
6029
|
|
6030 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
|
|
6031 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
|
|
6032
|
|
6033 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
|
|
6034 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
|
|
6035 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
|
|
6036 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
|
|
6037 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
|
|
6038 all caps.
|
|
6039
|
|
6040 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
|
|
6041 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
|
|
6042
|
|
6043 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
|
|
6044 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
|
|
6045 as in previous Emacs versions.
|
|
6046
|
|
6047 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
|
|
6048 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
|
|
6049 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
|
|
6050 frames.
|
|
6051
|
|
6052 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
|
|
6053 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
|
|
6054 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
|
|
6055 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
|
|
6056 accident.
|
|
6057
|
|
6058 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
|
|
6059 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
|
|
6060 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
|
|
6061 line and then executing the macro.
|
|
6062
|
|
6063 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
|
|
6064
|
|
6065 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
|
|
6066 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
|
|
6067 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
|
|
6068 characters.
|
|
6069
|
|
6070 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
6071
|
|
6072 *** Font Lock support modes
|
|
6073
|
|
6074 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
|
|
6075 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
|
|
6076 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
|
|
6077 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
|
|
6078 Font Lock mode is enabled.
|
|
6079
|
|
6080 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
|
|
6081
|
|
6082 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
|
|
6083
|
|
6084 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
6085
|
|
6086 *** lazy-lock
|
|
6087
|
|
6088 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
|
|
6089 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
|
|
6090 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
|
|
6091 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
|
|
6092 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
|
|
6093 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
|
|
6094 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
|
|
6095
|
|
6096 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
|
|
6097
|
|
6098 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
|
|
6099
|
|
6100 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
|
|
6101
|
|
6102 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
6103
|
|
6104 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
|
|
6105 paren and key.
|
|
6106
|
|
6107 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
|
|
6108 supported.
|
|
6109
|
|
6110 ** Gnus changes.
|
|
6111
|
|
6112 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
|
|
6113 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
|
|
6114 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
|
|
6115 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
|
|
6116
|
|
6117 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
|
|
6118 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
|
|
6119
|
|
6120 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
|
|
6121 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
|
|
6122 obsolete.
|
|
6123
|
|
6124 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
|
|
6125 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
|
|
6126
|
|
6127 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
|
|
6128
|
|
6129 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
|
|
6130
|
|
6131 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
|
|
6132
|
|
6133 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
|
|
6134 referred.
|
|
6135
|
|
6136 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
|
|
6137
|
|
6138 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
|
|
6139
|
|
6140 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
|
|
6141
|
|
6142 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
|
|
6143
|
|
6144 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
|
|
6145 buffers.
|
|
6146
|
|
6147 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
|
|
6148
|
|
6149 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
|
|
6150
|
|
6151 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
|
|
6152
|
|
6153 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
|
|
6154
|
|
6155 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
|
|
6156
|
|
6157 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
|
|
6158
|
|
6159 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
|
|
6160
|
|
6161 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
|
|
6162 is possible.
|
|
6163
|
|
6164 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
|
|
6165
|
|
6166 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
|
|
6167 groups of groups.
|
|
6168
|
|
6169 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
|
|
6170
|
|
6171 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
|
|
6172 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
|
|
6173
|
|
6174 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
|
|
6175
|
|
6176 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
|
|
6177
|
|
6178 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
|
|
6179
|
|
6180 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
|
|
6181
|
|
6182 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
|
|
6183 expiration times.
|
|
6184
|
|
6185 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
|
|
6186
|
|
6187 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
|
|
6188 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
|
|
6189
|
|
6190 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
|
|
6191 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
|
|
6192 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
|
|
6193
|
|
6194 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
|
|
6195 articles with the `*' command.
|
|
6196
|
|
6197 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
|
|
6198
|
|
6199 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
|
|
6200
|
|
6201 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
|
|
6202
|
|
6203 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
|
|
6204
|
|
6205 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
|
|
6206 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
|
|
6207
|
|
6208 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
|
|
6209 buffer.
|
|
6210
|
|
6211 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
|
|
6212
|
|
6213 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
|
|
6214
|
|
6215 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
|
|
6216
|
|
6217 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
|
|
6218
|
|
6219 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
|
|
6220
|
|
6221 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
|
|
6222
|
|
6223 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
|
|
6224
|
|
6225 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
|
|
6226
|
|
6227 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
|
|
6228
|
|
6229 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
|
|
6230 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
|
|
6231
|
|
6232 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
|
|
6233 refetching.
|
|
6234
|
|
6235 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
|
|
6236
|
|
6237 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
|
|
6238 buffer to allow easier treatment.
|
|
6239
|
|
6240 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
|
|
6241
|
|
6242 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
|
|
6243
|
|
6244 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
|
|
6245
|
|
6246 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
|
|
6247 articles.
|
|
6248
|
|
6249 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
|
|
6250
|
|
6251 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
|
|
6252
|
|
6253 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
|
|
6254 cited text to hide is now customizable.
|
|
6255
|
|
6256 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
|
|
6257
|
|
6258 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
|
|
6259
|
|
6260 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
|
|
6261
|
|
6262 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
|
|
6263
|
|
6264 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
|
|
6265
|
|
6266 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
|
|
6267 in greater detail.
|
|
6268
|
|
6269 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
|
|
6270
|
|
6271 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
|
|
6272 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
|
|
6273 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
|
|
6274 exists.
|
|
6275
|
|
6276 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
|
|
6277 as well as lists.
|
|
6278
|
|
6279 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
|
|
6280 of a given keymap.
|
|
6281
|
|
6282 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
|
|
6283 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
|
|
6284 keymap or nil.
|
|
6285
|
|
6286 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
|
|
6287 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
|
|
6288 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
|
|
6289 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
|
|
6290 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
|
|
6291 alias.
|
|
6292
|
|
6293 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
|
|
6294
|
|
6295 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
|
|
6296
|
|
6297 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
|
|
6298 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
|
|
6299 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
|
|
6300 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
|
|
6301 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
|
|
6302
|
|
6303 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
|
|
6304 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
|
|
6305 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
|
|
6306
|
|
6307 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
|
|
6308
|
|
6309 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
|
|
6310 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
|
|
6311 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
|
|
6312 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
|
|
6313 chapter of the manual for details.
|
|
6314
|
|
6315 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
|
|
6316 customization variables take effect.
|
|
6317
|
|
6318 ** Marking with the mouse.
|
|
6319
|
|
6320 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
|
|
6321 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
|
|
6322 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
|
|
6323
|
|
6324 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
|
|
6325
|
|
6326 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
|
|
6327
|
|
6328 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
|
|
6329 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
|
|
6330
|
|
6331 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
|
|
6332 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
|
|
6333 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
|
|
6334 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
|
|
6335 applications, these problems are significant.
|
|
6336
|
|
6337 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
|
|
6338 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
|
|
6339 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
|
|
6340 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
|
|
6341 other DOS application as a subprocess.
|
|
6342
|
|
6343 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
|
|
6344 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
|
|
6345
|
|
6346 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
|
|
6347 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
|
|
6348 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
|
|
6349 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
|
|
6350 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
|
|
6351 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
|
|
6352
|
|
6353 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
|
|
6354
|
|
6355 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
|
|
6356 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
|
|
6357 minibuffer contains.
|
|
6358
|
|
6359 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
|
|
6360
|
|
6361 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
|
|
6362 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
|
|
6363 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
|
|
6364 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
|
|
6365
|
|
6366 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
|
|
6367 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
|
|
6368 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
|
|
6369 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
|
|
6370
|
|
6371 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
|
|
6372 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
|
|
6373
|
|
6374 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
|
|
6375 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
|
|
6376 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
|
|
6377
|
|
6378 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
|
|
6379 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
|
|
6380 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
|
|
6381 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
|
|
6382
|
|
6383 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
|
|
6384
|
|
6385 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
|
|
6386 to replace the characters it "deletes".
|
|
6387
|
|
6388 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
|
|
6389
|
|
6390 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
|
|
6391 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
|
|
6392 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
|
|
6393 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
|
|
6394 immediately after the selected one.
|
|
6395
|
|
6396 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
|
|
6397 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
|
|
6398
|
|
6399 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
|
|
6400
|
|
6401 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
|
|
6402 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
|
|
6403 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
|
|
6404 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
|
|
6405 recover-session.
|
|
6406
|
|
6407 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
|
|
6408 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
|
|
6409 will not work.
|
|
6410
|
|
6411 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
|
|
6412 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
|
|
6413 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
|
|
6414 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
|
|
6415 now that the bug is fixed.
|
|
6416
|
|
6417 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
|
|
6418
|
|
6419 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
|
|
6420 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
|
|
6421 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
|
|
6422 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
|
|
6423
|
|
6424 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
|
|
6425 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
|
|
6426 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
|
|
6427 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
|
|
6428
|
|
6429 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
|
|
6430 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
|
|
6431 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
|
|
6432
|
|
6433 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
|
|
6434 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
|
|
6435 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
|
|
6436 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
|
|
6437 remain normal.
|
|
6438
|
|
6439 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
|
|
6440 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
|
|
6441
|
|
6442 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
|
|
6443 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
|
|
6444 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
|
|
6445 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
|
|
6446
|
|
6447 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
|
|
6448 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
|
|
6449 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
|
|
6450 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
|
|
6451 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
|
|
6452 `mail-directory-stream'.)
|
|
6453
|
|
6454 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
|
|
6455 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
|
|
6456 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
|
|
6457 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
|
|
6458
|
|
6459 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
|
|
6460 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
|
|
6461 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
|
|
6462
|
|
6463 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
|
|
6464 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
|
|
6465 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
|
|
6466 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
|
|
6467 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
|
|
6468 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
|
|
6469 to a limitation in font-lock).
|
|
6470
|
|
6471 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
|
|
6472
|
|
6473 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
|
|
6474 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
|
|
6475 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
|
|
6476 this example:
|
|
6477
|
|
6478 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
|
|
6479 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
|
|
6480
|
|
6481 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
|
|
6482
|
|
6483 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
|
|
6484
|
|
6485 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
|
|
6486
|
|
6487 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
|
|
6488
|
|
6489 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
|
|
6490 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
|
|
6491 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
|
|
6492 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
|
|
6493 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
|
|
6494 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
|
|
6495
|
|
6496 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
|
|
6497 does the same job.
|
|
6498
|
|
6499 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
|
|
6500 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
|
|
6501
|
|
6502 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
|
|
6503 text.
|
|
6504
|
|
6505 ** Font Lock mode
|
|
6506
|
|
6507 *** Global Font Lock mode
|
|
6508
|
|
6509 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
|
|
6510 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
|
|
6511 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
|
|
6512 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
|
|
6513 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
|
|
6514
|
|
6515 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
|
|
6516
|
|
6517 (global-font-lock-mode t)
|
|
6518
|
|
6519 in your ~/.emacs.
|
|
6520
|
|
6521 *** Local Refontification
|
|
6522
|
|
6523 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
|
|
6524 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
|
|
6525 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
|
|
6526 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
|
|
6527
|
|
6528 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
|
|
6529 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
|
|
6530 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
|
|
6531 above and below point.
|
|
6532
|
|
6533 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
|
|
6534
|
|
6535 ** Follow mode
|
|
6536
|
|
6537 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
|
|
6538 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
|
|
6539 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
|
|
6540 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
|
|
6541 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
|
|
6542 follow-mode.
|
|
6543
|
|
6544 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
|
|
6545
|
|
6546 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
|
|
6547 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
|
|
6548
|
|
6549 ** hide-show changes.
|
|
6550
|
|
6551 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
|
|
6552 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
|
|
6553 normal hooks.
|
|
6554
|
|
6555 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
|
|
6556 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
|
|
6557
|
|
6558 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
|
|
6559 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
|
|
6560 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
|
|
6561
|
|
6562 ** MSDOS Changes
|
|
6563
|
|
6564 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
|
|
6565 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
|
|
6566
|
|
6567 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
|
|
6568 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
|
|
6569
|
|
6570 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
|
|
6571
|
|
6572 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
|
|
6573 pressing both mouse buttons.
|
|
6574
|
|
6575 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
|
|
6576 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
|
|
6577 are:
|
|
6578
|
|
6579 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
|
|
6580 now works.
|
|
6581
|
|
6582 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
|
|
6583
|
|
6584 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
|
|
6585 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
|
|
6586
|
|
6587 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
|
|
6588
|
|
6589 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
|
|
6590
|
|
6591 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
|
|
6592
|
|
6593 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
|
|
6594
|
|
6595 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
|
|
6596
|
|
6597 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
|
|
6598
|
|
6599 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
|
|
6600 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
|
|
6601 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
|
|
6602 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
|
|
6603 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
|
|
6604
|
|
6605 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
|
|
6606
|
|
6607 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
|
|
6608 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
|
|
6609 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
|
|
6610 be different.
|
|
6611
|
|
6612 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
|
|
6613 than `system-type'.
|
|
6614
|
|
6615 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
|
|
6616
|
|
6617 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
|
|
6618 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
|
|
6619
|
|
6620 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
|
|
6621 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
|
|
6622
|
|
6623 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
|
|
6624 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
|
|
6625 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
|
|
6626
|
|
6627 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
|
|
6628 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
|
|
6629 like this:
|
|
6630
|
|
6631 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
|
|
6632
|
|
6633 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
|
|
6634 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
|
|
6635 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
|
|
6636
|
|
6637 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
|
|
6638 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
|
|
6639 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
|
|
6640
|
|
6641 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
|
|
6642 up if too much time passes.
|
|
6643
|
|
6644 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
|
|
6645
|
|
6646 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
|
|
6647 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
|
|
6648 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
|
|
6649 form in BODY.
|
|
6650
|
|
6651 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
|
|
6652 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
|
|
6653 call looks like this:
|
|
6654
|
|
6655 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
|
|
6656
|
|
6657 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
|
|
6658 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
|
|
6659 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
|
|
6660 ARGS.
|
|
6661
|
|
6662 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
|
|
6663 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
|
|
6664 command.
|
|
6665
|
|
6666 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
|
|
6667 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
|
|
6668 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
|
|
6669 each time Emacs becomes idle.
|
|
6670
|
|
6671 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
|
|
6672 idle for SECS seconds.
|
|
6673
|
|
6674 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
|
|
6675 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
|
|
6676 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
|
|
6677 instead.
|
|
6678
|
|
6679 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
|
|
6680 there is no answer within a certain time.
|
|
6681
|
|
6682 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
|
|
6683
|
|
6684 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
|
|
6685 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
|
|
6686 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
|
|
6687
|
|
6688 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
|
|
6689 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
|
|
6690 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
|
|
6691 arguments in between are ignored.
|
|
6692
|
|
6693 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
|
|
6694 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
|
|
6695
|
|
6696 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
|
|
6697 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
|
|
6698 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
|
|
6699 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
|
|
6700 version.
|
|
6701
|
|
6702 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
|
|
6703 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
|
|
6704 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
|
|
6705 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
|
|
6706 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
|
|
6707 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
|
|
6708
|
|
6709 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
|
|
6710 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
|
|
6711 systems with limited file name syntax.
|
|
6712
|
|
6713 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
|
|
6714 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
|
|
6715 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
|
|
6716 completions.el:
|
|
6717
|
|
6718 (defvar save-completions-file-name
|
|
6719 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
|
|
6720 "*The filename to save completions to.")
|
|
6721
|
|
6722 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
|
|
6723 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
|
|
6724 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
|
|
6725 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
|
|
6726 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
|
|
6727
|
|
6728 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
|
|
6729 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
|
|
6730 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
|
|
6731
|
|
6732 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
|
|
6733 marker from its buffer position.
|
|
6734
|
|
6735 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
|
|
6736 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
|
|
6737 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
|
|
6738
|
|
6739 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
|
|
6740 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
|
|
6741 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
|
|
6742 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
|
|
6743 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
|
|
6744 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
|
|
6745
|
|
6746 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
|
|
6747 errors that happen often during editing.
|
|
6748
|
|
6749 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
|
|
6750 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
|
|
6751 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
|
|
6752
|
|
6753 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
|
|
6754 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
|
|
6755
|
|
6756 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
|
|
6757 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
|
|
6758 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
|
|
6759 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
|
|
6760 and not get-buffer-window.
|
|
6761
|
|
6762 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
|
|
6763 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
|
|
6764 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
|
|
6765
|
|
6766 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
|
|
6767 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
|
|
6768 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
|
|
6769 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
|
|
6770 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
|
|
6771 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
|
|
6772 over and over for the same text.
|
|
6773
|
|
6774 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
|
|
6775
|
|
6776 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
|
|
6777 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
|
|
6778
|
|
6779 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
|
|
6780 ;; $HEADER: text $
|
|
6781
|
|
6782 in addition to the normal
|
|
6783
|
|
6784 ;; HEADER: text
|
|
6785
|
|
6786 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
|
|
6787 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
|
|
6788 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
|
|
6789
|
|
6790 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
|
|
6791
|
|
6792 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
6793 Copyright information:
|
|
6794
|
|
6795 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
6796
|
|
6797 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
|
|
6798 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
|
|
6799 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
|
|
6800 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
|
|
6801
|
|
6802 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
|
|
6803 of this document, or of portions of it,
|
|
6804 under the above conditions, provided also that they
|
|
6805 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
|
|
6806
|
|
6807 Local variables:
|
|
6808 mode: outline
|
|
6809 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
|
|
6810 end:
|